OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 FIAT 500X
FIAT 500X
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing
& Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
16FB-126-AE
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .........................................................9
3
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................19
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . ............................................25
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . .................................157
6
SAFETY .....................................................................207
7
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................279
8
INCASEOFEMERGENCY .......................................................381
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE ....................................459
10
TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................539
11
MULTIMEDIA................................................................547
12
INDEX .....................................................................601
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be as-
sured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc-
tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty with terms and conditions for maintain-
ing its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
8 INTRODUCTION
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................11
▫ Prepare For The Appointment .............11
▫ Prepare A List .........................11
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............11
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............11
▫ FIAT Customer Center...................12
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center .............12
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................12
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands .........13
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ..............13
▫ Service Contract .......................13
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............14
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............15
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . .15
▫ In Canada ...........................15
2
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If
you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
2
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 11
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone:
1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-
465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
12 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
2
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 13
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
14 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa,
Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are
accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
2
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 15
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting,
operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well
as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
16 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
2
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 17
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
18 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Engine Compartment
2 — Headlights
3 — Windshield
4 — Outside Mirrors
5 — Doors
6 — Wheels
20 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
3
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 21
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents 7 — Upper Switch Bank 13 — Lower Switch Bank
2 — Multifunction Lever 8 — Upper Storage Compartment 14 — Driver Side Knee Air Bag
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Front Air Bag 15 — Ignition
4 — Speed Controls 10 — Air Vents 16 — Driver Side Front Air Bag
5 — Windshield Wiper Lever 11 — Lower Storage/Glove Compartment 17 — EVIC Controls
6 — Audio System 12 — Climate Controls 18 — Headlight Switch
22 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches
2 — Headlight Switch
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Audio System
5 — Glove Compartment
6 — Seats
7 — Switch Panel
8 — Transmission Gear Selector (Automatic/Manual Options)
9 — Electronic Speed Controls
10 — EVIC Controls
3
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS ................................30
▫ Mechanical Key Fob ....................30
▫ Electronic Key Fob .....................31
▫ Key Fob Operation .....................32
▫ Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control........................34
▫ Request For Additional Keys ..............37
▫ General Information ....................38
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .....................38
▫ Operation ............................38
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .42
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . .43
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................43
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............44
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle ..........................45
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ..............................45
▫
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . .46
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ................46
4
▫ General Information ....................46
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................47
▫ General Information ....................48
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM...............48
▫ To Arm The System ....................49
▫ To Disarm The System ...................50
▫ Disabling ............................51
䡵 DOORS ..............................52
▫ Manual Locking/Unlocking ...............52
▫ Central Lock/Unlock....................53
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go ....................55
▫ Child Locks ..........................62
䡵 SEATS ...............................64
▫ Manual Front Seats .....................65
▫ Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped .....66
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped...............68
▫ Rear Seats............................69
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS .....................73
▫ Front Head Restraints ...................73
▫ Rear Head Restraints ....................75
䡵 STEERING WHEEL ......................77
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..........77
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .......78
䡵 MIRRORS .............................79
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................79
▫ Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ........80
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................81
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............82
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................82
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) ..................88
▫ Mode Of Operation .....................90
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings .......91
▫ General Information ....................92
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ......................92
▫ Headlights ...........................92
▫ Automatic Lighting — If Equipped .........93
▫
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .94
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........94
▫ Parking Lights ........................95
▫ Headlight Delay .......................95
▫ High Beams ..........................95
▫ Turn Signals .........................96
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS ......................96
▫ Front Courtesy Light ....................96
▫ Rear Dome Light — If Equipped...........100
▫ Cargo Area Lights .....................101
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer And Ambient
Light Control ........................101
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS .................102
▫ Front Wiper Operation .................102
▫ Rain Sensor — If Equipped ..............104
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............106
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . .107
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................108
▫ Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations —
Passenger Compartment.................108
▫ Manual Climate Controls — If Equipped . . . .109
▫ Automatic Climate Controls — If Equipped . .114
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................127
▫ Driver’s Door Controls..................127
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........131
▫ Opening The Sunroof...................133
▫ Closing The Sunroof ...................133
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................133
▫ Sun Shade...........................133
▫ Anti-Pinch Safety Device ................134
▫ Emergency Operation...................134
▫ Power Sunroof Relearn Procedure ..........135
䡵 HOOD ..............................135
▫ Opening ............................135
▫ Closing.............................137
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................138
▫ Opening ............................138
▫ Closing.............................140
▫ Cargo Area Features ...................141
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .................144
▫ Glove Compartments ...................144
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sun Visors “Slide-On-Rod” ..............146
▫ Power Outlets .......................147
▫ Cigar Lighter — Optional................149
▫ Ashtray — If Equipped .................151
▫ Front Armrest .......................151
▫ Cupholders .........................153
▫ Grab Handles ........................153
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .154
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
KEYS
Mechanical Key Fob
The metal insert of the Key Fob operates:
• The Ignition System
• Driver’s Door Lock
Mechanical Key Fob
1 — Mechanical Key
2 — Door Lock Button
3 — Door Unlock Button
4 — Panic Button
5 — Mechanical Key Button (Open/Close)
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Key Fob
On versions equipped with ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go,⬙ the car
is equipped with an Electronic Key Fob.
The Key Fob with Remote Control contains a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE system allows
you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20
m) using a handheld Key Fob with a RKE transmitter.
The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, the trunk release
button is disabled. Only the UNLOCK button is enabled.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob
1 — Door Lock Button
2 — Remote Start Button
3 — Panic Button
4 — Emergency Key
5 — Door Unlock Button
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Key Fob Operation
Unlocking Doors And Liftgate
The driver’s door may be unlocked by inserting the
vehicle key into the exterior driver’s door lock cylinder.
To unlock all the doors, push the interior power door
UNLOCK button on the door panel.
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
Emergency Key Release/Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Locking Doors And Liftgate
The doors may be locked by inserting the vehicle key into
the exterior driver’s door lock cylinder.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal. Settings in the radio can change to lights only,
chirp only, or both.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle
Key
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. This is signaled by a quick flash of the
turn signals.
Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again only if the
key is inside the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
• The current setting can be changed within the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) menu or in
the Uconnect Settings so that the system will allow/
inhibit the ability to lock the doors when one or more
of them are open.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
• Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Key Fob With Remote Control
1.
Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if
equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the RKE
transmitter apart using a screwdriver or similar tool.
Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Integrated Vehicle Key Battery Removal
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar surface. Then,
replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the
battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
Integrated Vehicle Key Battery Removal
1 — RKE Transmitter
2 — Battery Flap
3 — Battery
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Separating Keyless Enter-N-Go Transmitter Case
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb. Then, pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if
equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart with the emergency key. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar surface. Then,
replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the
battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
Separating Keyless Enter-N-Go Transmitter Case
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together and insert the emergency key.
Request For Additional Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Battery
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Operation
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a Key Fob with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an Integrated Mechanical Key Ignition.
The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Push Button Ignition.
Mechanical Key
The Mechanical Key has three operating positions, two
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are STOP/OFF, MAR/RUN, and AVV/START.
The AVV/START position is a spring-loaded momentary
contact position. When released from the AVV/START
position, the switch automatically returns to the MAR/
RUN position.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1 — STOP/OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• The key can be removed from the ignition.
• The steering column can be locked (with the ignition
key removed).
• Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
2 — MAR/RUN
• Driving position.
• Electrical devices are available.
3 — AVV/START
• Start the engine.
The ignition switch is provided with a safety mechanism.
If the engine fails to start, the ignition will return to the
STOP/OFF position prior to repeating the starting pro-
cedure.
On models equipped with an automatic transmission, the
ignition key is only removable when the gear selector is
in PARK.
Integrated Mechanical Key Ignition
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Electronic Key
This Keyless Enter-N-Go system feature allows the driver
to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in
the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three operating
positions. The three positions are STOP, RUN, and START.
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Engine Start Stop Button
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Push Button Ignition can be placed in the
following positions:
STOP
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm,
etc.) are still available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the engine.
NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the Key Fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the MAR/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove key
from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting the Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
246 ft (75 m).
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control and (if equipped) the optional heated seats and
optional heated steering wheel depending on tempera-
tures outside and inside the car.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the MAR/RUN position.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn
signals will flash, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
for vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go fea-
ture push and release the START/STOP button; for
vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go feature
put the key in RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Dispay
(DID) until you push the START button.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Key to RUN” will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) until you put the key in RUN
position.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering
wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. These features will stay on
through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition
switch is cycled to the MAR/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-
vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For
more information on Remote Start Comfort System op-
eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation will continue.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank if an invalid Key Fob tries to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, if
there is a problem with the system, the Vehicle Security
Light will turn on. This condition will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and if the ignition switch is cycled
to the ON/RUN position without a valid key. While the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks and liftgate release are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• Horn will pulse.
• Park lamps and/or turn signals will flash.
• Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the STOP/
OFF position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Start-
ing And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is STOP/OFF,
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
Vehicle Security Light Location
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (for further information, refer to
⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your
Vehicle”).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
• If a second chime is heard after approximately four
seconds from arming the alarm, disarm the alarm by
pushing the UNLOCK button. Check for the correct
closure of doors and Liftgate, then reactivate the
system by following steps 1 and 2.
• If a second chime is heard after approximately four
seconds from arming the alarm, even with the doors
and Liftgate properly closed, a fault may have oc-
curred during the arming operation. If this occurs,
contact your authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if
equipped). Refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Getting
To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further information.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the STOP/OFF
position.
– For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
– For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the MAR/RUN position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected.
Disabling
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long
inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning the vehicle
key in the exterior door lock cylinder.
NOTE: If the batteries in the RKE transmitter discharge
in the event of a failure to the system, or to switch off the
alarm, place the ignition in the MAR/RUN position.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
DOORS
Manual Locking/Unlocking
Locking/Unlocking Doors From Inside
To lock each door, rotate the door lock button on each
door trim panel forward. To unlock the doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the lock symbol is no longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately as well as the liftgate.
Manual Lock/Unlock Switch
1 — Door Unlocked
2 — Door Locked
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the MAR/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove key
from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Central Lock/Unlock
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. This switch is used to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Locking/Unlocking From The Inside
Push the LOCK button on the driver or passenger door
trim panel to lock the doors.
With the doors locked, push the UNLOCK button to
unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system if equipped.
For further information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the MAR/RUN position, and any front door is open,
the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking the key in the vehicle. Placing the
ignition in the STOP/OFF position or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the
ignition is in the MAR/RUN position, a chime will sound
as a reminder to remove the key.
NOTE: If all of the doors are closed properly, the door
locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Power Lock/Unlock Switch
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Enter-N-Go
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm
will arm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle LOCK button. This could unlock the door(s).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter while a door is ajar.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is ajar.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is ajar.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and it does
not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
If the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is
low or dead, the emergency key can be used to unlock the
driver side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as follows:
1. Slide the emergency key release button to the side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the Key Fob with
Remote Control housing.
NOTE: The Emergency Key can be inserted into the door
lock cylinder in either direction.
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
severely injured or killed. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal, or the gear selector. Do not leave the Key Fob
in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go in the MAR/
RUN mode. A child could start the vehicle, operate
power windows, other controls, or move the ve-
hicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause them to be severely injured or killed.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
Electronic Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Electronic Liftgate Release Button
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC/DID, if equipped, all doors will unlock when you
push the Electronic Release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate will
unlock when you push the electronic lock/unlock button
on the liftgate. For further information, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry LOCK
button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will only
lock the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into
the Electronic Liftgate release.
Activation/Deactivation Of Keyless Enter-N-Go
Keyless Enter-N-Go can be activated or deactivated
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
or through the Uconnect system.
Liftgate Passive Entry Lock Button
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
only be opened by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate
the lock button to the unlocked position, roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seats
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the forward/
rearward adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats,
near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
(Continued)
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recline Lever
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Height Adjustment
The front driver and passenger seats height can be raised
or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side
of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat
height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat
height.
Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped
The power seat controls are located on the outboard side
of the seat, close to the floor.
Use the switch to move the seat up/down, forward/
rearward, tilt if equipped and to set the angle of the
seatback.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Recline Adjustment
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch.
Power Lumbar Adjustment
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located on the instrument
panel.
You can choose between two heating levels:
• Push the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 145
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the dis-
play will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after
approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the heated seats
can be programmed to come on during a Remote Start
until the ignition switch is cycled to the MAR/RUN
position.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto On Comfort — If Equipped
If the external temperature is below 41 °F (5 °C) at each
start-up of the vehicle the heated seat functionality of the
driver’s seat is turned on to HI-level.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Rear Seats
The split rear seat increases the storage of the rear cargo
area.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
• You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Removing Shelf — If Equipped
Proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the shelf at the
eyelets.
2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf.
3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf, and then
remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.
Rear Shelf Support Links
1 — Eyelets
2 — Links
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area, or
behind the front seatbacks.
Partial Enlargement Of Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you
to carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear
seat, while the enlargement of the right side allows you to
carry two passengers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat
and rest them on the seat belt guide.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or right
rear seatback completely forward.
Seatback Release Lever
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional
storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of the
rear seatbacks completely forward.
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides on the top
edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks properly latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock
on both the latches. Verify the red notches are no
longer visible on the release lever. If the red notches
are visible, the seatback is not secure.
Rear Seat Latch
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with driver and passenger head
restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
To remove the head restraint recline the backrest of the
seat to avoid interference with the roof. Raise the head
restraint as far as it can go then push the release button
and adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head re-
straints and one center head restraint for its rear passen-
gers. The rear head restraints can be raised or lowered.
When the center seat is being occupied, the head restraint
should be in the raised position. When there are no
occupants in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the release button and adjustment button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel
1 — Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel Lever
2 — Locked Position
3 — Unlocked Position
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping
lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or downward
as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/
telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel switch
has been turned on, it will
operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off
early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm. The heated steering wheel control
button is located on the center of the instrument panel
below the climate controls.
Auto On Comfort — If Equipped
If the external temperature is below 41 °F (5 °C) at each
start-up of the vehicle the heated steering wheel func-
tionality is turned on.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind
you can be reduced by moving the lever under the mirror
to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while the lever under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Mirror Lever
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
NOTE: The mirror will automatically release in the event
of heavy contact with a passenger.
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Dimming Mirror
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Power Adjustment Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door
panel.
To adjust the mirror, push the mirror adjustment switch
in the four directions indicated by arrows.
NOTE:
• To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in
the MAR/RUN position.
• Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
2 — Mirror Selector Switch
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Folding Mirror
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
Rear Window Defroster.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Folding Exterior Mirror
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi-
mately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary to
deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu to
avoid a miss-detection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Detection Zones
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the radar sensors located on the
rear fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
Rear Sensor Locations
BSM Warning Light
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(25 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
1 mph (2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
RCP Detection Zones
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Mode Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Sensor Blinded
In the case of a sensor blinded:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continu-
ously.
• A instrument cluster message will display “Blind Spot
Monitoring Unavailable - Wipe Rear Bumper Cor-
ners.”
NOTE: The rear bumper must be clean and free of any
obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporary unavailable:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continu-
ously.
• A instrument cluster message will display “Blind Spot
Monitoring Temporary Unavailable.”
In the case of the system being completely unavailable:
• A chime will turn on.
• A instrument cluster message will display “Blind Spot
Monitoring Unavailable - Service Required.”
NOTE: Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
dealer for service.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, side marker lights, daytime
running lights, fog lights and the dimming of the instru-
ment cluster and interior lighting.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument
cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel.
Automatic Lighting — If Equipped
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED,
located on the windshield. It detects changes in light
intensity outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of
light set by using the Menu on the display or on the
Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of
external light required for controlling the lighting.
Automatic Headlights
Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
When the automatic headlights are enabled, the head-
light time delay is active. After the ignition switch is
placed in the STOP/OFF position, the headlights will
automatically turn off after approximately 90 seconds
depending on the settings of the feature.
Headlight Switch
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
The timing of the headlights is adjustable between 0, 30,
60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when
the engine is started and remain on unless the headlights
are turned on or the engine is shut off.
The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal operation
and resume operation when the turn signal operation has
ended.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push the
headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight
switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
• The fog lights will operate with the low beam head-
lights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
• The fog lights also function as cornering lights. There-
fore there will be times when only one light is on.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights
Rotate the headlight switch to the first position to turn on
the parking lights. The parking light indicator in the
cluster will illuminate.
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable be-
tween 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within two minutes. The
delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned
off.
Headlight Delay Disable
The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the
parking lights or by placing the ignition in the MAR/
RUN position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within two minutes
of placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position to
activate this feature.
High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push the turn signal
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) and an
indicator will illuminate in the cluster. To turn off the
high beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward (toward
the rear of the vehicle).
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE: The headlights must be on for the high beams to
activate.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front Courtesy Light
The courtesy lights will automatically turn on when the
door is open or closed. The light switches in the overhead
console are for reading lamps.
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the driver or passenger light switch to operate the
reading lamps individually.
NOTE:
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on it will automatically be turned off
after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in
the STOP/OFF position.
Dome Light Timing
The Dome Light will automatically illuminate when the
doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the
doors are closed.
Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
• When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
Overhead Console
1 — Left Courtesy/reading Light
2 — Left Light Switch
3 — Right Light Switch
4 — Right Courtesy/reading Light
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
• When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately three minutes.
• When the doors are closed, the dome light will auto-
matically shut off after approximately 27 seconds.
NOTE: The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the
MAR/RUN or AVV/START position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the following
conditions:
• The dome light is disabled when the ignition is placed
in the MAR/RUN or AVV/START position.
• The dome lights will turn off automatically when the
doors are locked.
• The dome lights will automatically turn off after
approximately fifteen minutes of inactivity to preserve
the battery.
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the following
conditions when the ignition is turned to the STOP/OFF
position and the key is removed:
• The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after the
key is removed from the ignition.
• The opening of one of the doors (approximately three
minutes).
• After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are
locked.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn the light off.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Glove Compartment Light
An interior light is located is the lower glove compart-
ment.
This light automatically turn ON/OFF when the glove
compartment is opened and closed, regardless of the
position of the ignition.
NOTE: In order to preserve the life of the battery, the
light will turn off after 15 minutes.
Vanity Mirror Light
Lower Glove Compartment Light
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Rear Dome Light — If Equipped
Push the button on the rear dome light once to turn the
light ON, the light will remain ON at all times. Push the
button a second time to turn the light OFF, the lights will
remain OFF until a door is opened.
Vehicles With Retractable Roof
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are
two interior lights located below the grab handles of the
rear doors.
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.
Rear Dome Light
Rear Interior Light
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Lights
An interior light is located on the left side panel in the
cargo area.
This light automatically turn ON/OFF when the liftgate
is opened and closed, regardless of the position of the
ignition.
NOTE: In order to preserve the life of the battery, the
light will turn off after 15 minutes.
Instrument Panel Dimmer And Ambient Light
Control
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, lower instrument panel lights, door map pocket
lights, and cubby bin lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument
panel. At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer,
all the interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom
most setting of the thumb wheel will turn all the interior
lights to their lowest dimmable setting.
Cargo Light
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Front Wiper Operation
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
lever on the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Headlight Switch
1 — Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
Windshield Wiper Stalk
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two
detent positions for intermittent settings, the third detent
for low wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make occa-
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensor — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of two settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most
sensitive. Setting one should be used for normal rain
conditions, and can be used if the driver desires less
Rain Sensor Location
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
wiper sensitivity. Setting two can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
the ignition switch in the MAR/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the lever
on the right side of the steering column. The rear
wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at
the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the lever is
released, the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the STOP/OFF position, the wiper will automatically
return to the “park” position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located with
the Climate Controls on the instrument panel.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is
below 40° F (4.4° C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Re-
mote Start is active and the outside ambient tempera-
ture is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be enabled. Upon exiting remote start
mode the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will remain on.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger
Compartment
Left Side Air Outlets
1 — Fixed Air Outlet
2 — Adjustable Air Outlet
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
4 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
Center Air Outlets
1 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
2 — Adjustable Air Outlet
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Controls — If Equipped
Right Side Air Outlets
1 — Fixed Air Outlet
2 — Adjustable Air Outlet
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
4 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
Manual Temperature Controls (MTC)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
The Manual Climate Controls consist of a series of rotary
dials with inner push buttons.
1. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control clockwise from
the “0” (OFF) position.
2. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial
counter-clockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red
area indicates warmer temperatures. Rotating the Tem-
perature Control all the way counter-clockwise results in
turning on the MAX A/C feature.
3. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-
justed to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be ad-
justed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demister outlets. Use this mode
with maximum blower and temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when required.
4. Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
5. A/C Button — If Equipped
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged.
6. Recirculation Button
Push this control button to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost
indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The
function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window de-
froster heating filaments do not affix stickers or other
objects to the inside of the rear glass.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Air Recirculation
Push and release the Air Recirculation button so that the
LED is on, to enter recirculation mode. It is recommended
to turn the internal air recirculation on while standing in
traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-
luted air.
Do not use the function for a long period of time,
particularly if there are many passengers in the vehicle,
to prevent the windows from misting up.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
reach the required heating or cooling conditions quickly
depending on the mode selected. Do not use the internal
air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of the windows
misting.
System Maintenance
In winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on
at least once a month for approximately 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which
does not pollute the environment in the event of acciden-
tal leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a
(refrigerant) allowed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Automatic Climate Controls — If Equipped
1. Driver Temperature Control
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired tempera-
ture shown in the Temperature Display. Rotate fully
counter-clockwise for maximum A/C (LO).
2. A/C Button
Push the A/C Control Button to change the current
setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON.
Pushing the AUTO control button will cause the A/C
operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indi-
cator will turn OFF.
3. MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is ON. Performing this function will
cause the automatic climate controls to change to manual
mode. The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs ON)
Automatic Climate Controls
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
when MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning
compressor is turned ON, both driver and passenger
temperature controls are set to (HI), defrost mode is
selected (LED ON), rear defroster is turned ON (LED
ON) and the air recirculation is turned OFF (LED OFF). If
the MAX Defrost mode is turned OFF, the climate system
will return to the previous setting.
4. Blower Control Indicator LEDs
A total of eight LEDs illuminate to visually indicate
blower speeds.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn ON the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically
turns OFF after 20 minutes.
6. AUTO Button
Pushing this button will automatically control the inte-
rior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution
and amount. Performing this function will cause the
automatic climate controls to change between manual
mode and automatic modes.
7. Passenger Temperature Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired tem-
perature shown in the Temperature Display.
NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control
knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Display
Rotate the Passenger Temperature Control dial clockwise
or counter-clockwise to adjust the air temperature in the
front right (Passenger Temperature Control) zone of the
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
passenger compartment. The set temperature is shown
on the display. Turning the control knob completely in
one direction or the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum
heating) or ⬙LO⬙ (maximum cooling) functions shown in
the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions,
turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature.
9. SYNC Button
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF.
The Sync indicator will illuminate when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync mode will automatically exit this feature and return
to the separate management of air temperatures in the
two zones.
10. Mode Buttons
Airflow distribution modes can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, de-mist
outlets and defrost outlets by selecting these buttons.
One, two or all modes may be selected at any one time.
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower
will cause the automatic mode to change to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected by rotating the
Blower Control adjustment knob.
12. ON/OFF Button
Push this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
13. Recirculation Button
Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates
when ON.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button
will change the setting to normal Defrost mode. This
indicates that you can not enter to this mode due to
fogging risk.
• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation
indicator is OFF, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode.
If the Recirculation indicator is ON, the Recirculation
setting is manual and Recirculation is ON.
14. Driver Temperature Display
Rotate the Driver Temperature Control dial clockwise or
counter-clockwise, to adjust the air temperature in the
front left (Driver Temperature Control) zone of the pas-
senger compartment. The set temperature is shown on
the display. Turning the control knob completely in one
direction or the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum heat-
ing) or ⬙LO⬙ (maximum cooling) functions shown in the
display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn
the temperature knob to the desired temperature.
Description
The Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control system regu-
lates the air temperatures in the passenger compartment
in two zones: driver side and passenger side.
The system maintains comfort inside the passenger com-
partment and compensates for possible variations in
external climate conditions.
The Climate Control system can recognize extremely cold
(or extremely hot) conditions in the passenger compart-
ment and provide optimal management of the system’s
capabilities.
NOTE: The reference temperature is 72° F (22° C) for
optimal comfort management.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
The automatically controlled functions are:
• Air temperature at the driver/front passenger side
vents.
• Blower speed (continuous variation of the air flow).
• Compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying
the air).
• Air recirculation.
All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat-
ing the system, selecting one or more functions and
modifying their parameters.
Automatic control of the functions will be suspended: the
system will only override the settings for safety reasons.
Manual selections always take priority over automatic
ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pushed or
the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons.
The amount of air introduced into the passenger com-
partment is not affected by car speed; it is regulated by
the fan, which is controlled electronically.
The air temperature is always automatically controlled
according to the temperature set on the display (except
for when the system is off or in certain conditions when
the compressor is not running).
The system allows the following to be set or adjusted
manually:
• Driver/passenger side air temperature
• Blower speed (continuous variation)
• Air distribution to seven positions
• Compressor activation
• Rapid defrosting/demisting function
• Air recirculation
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Heated rear window
• System deactivation
NOTE: The Climate Control system detects the passenger
compartment temperature using a temperature sensor,
located in the lower instrument panel between the center
console and the steering wheel.
Turning On The Climate Control System
The Climate Control system can be turned on in different
ways: it is recommended to turn the Temperature Control
knobs to set the desired temperatures and then push the
AUTO button.
The system operates automatically to adjust the tempera-
ture, quantity and distribution of the air introduced into
the passenger compartment. It also manages the air
recirculation function and the activation of the air condi-
tioning compressor.
During automatic operation, you can change the set
temperatures, air distribution and blower speed at any
time by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system
will automatically change the settings to adjust to the
new requirements.
During automatic operation (AUTO), varying the air
flow and/or distribution or pushing the A/C control
button causes the AUTO function LED to turn off and the
system to operate in MANUAL mode.
Adjusting The Air Temperature
Rotate the Driver Temperature Control, or the Passenger
Temperature Control, dial clockwise or counter-
clockwise, to adjust the air temperature in the front left
(Driver Temperature Control) or right (Passenger Tem-
perature Control) zone of the passenger compartment.
The set temperatures are shown on the displays.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Push the SYNC button to align the air temperature
between the two zones.
Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return
to the separate management of air temperatures in the
two zones.
Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or
the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum heating) or ⬙LO⬙
(maximum cooling) functions respectively.
To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob
to the desired temperature.
Air Distribution Selection
By pushing the Mode Control buttons (Defrost/Panel/
Floor buttons), it is possible to set one of the seven
possible air distributions manually by activating one or
more mode buttons:
• Defrost Mode – Air flow to the windshield and front
side window diffusers to defrost them. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
• Panel Mode – Air flow is distributed between the
central and side instrument panel vents.
• Floor Mode – Air flow is directed from the front and
rear footwell diffusers.
• Floor and Panel Modes – Air flow is distributed
between the footwell diffusers and the central and side
instrument panel vents.
• Floor and Defrost Modes – Air flow distributed be-
tween footwell diffusers and windshield and front side
window defrosting diffusers. This distribution setting
allows the passenger compartment to be warmed
effectively and prevents the windows from misting.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Defrost and Panel Modes – Air flow distribution
between windshield defrosting diffusers and side and
central instrument panel vents.
• Defrost, Panel and Floor Modes – Air flow distribution
to all the diffusers.
NOTE: Air always flows from the side instrument panel
diffusers: it is, however, possible to interrupt the air flow
by operating the wheel located near the corresponding
vents.
In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically
manages air distribution (LEDs on the Mode Control
buttons are off).
When set manually, the air distribution is indicated by
the LEDs on the selected buttons turning on.
In combined function mode, functions are enabled to-
gether with those already set when the relevant button is
pushed. If a button whose function is already active is
pushed, the operation is cancelled and the corresponding
LED turns off.
To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a
manual selection, push the AUTO button.
Adjusting The Fan Speed
Rotate the Blower Control knob to increase/decrease the
fan speed.
The speed is indicated by the eight Blower Control
Indicator LEDs, located above the Blower Control knob,
turning on.
• Maximum blower speed = all LEDs illuminated
• Minimum blower speed = one LED illuminated
The blower can only be turned off if the A/C compressor
has been turned off by pushing the A/C Control button.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
NOTE: To restore automatic control of the fan speed after
a manual adjustment, push the AUTO button.
AUTO Button
When the AUTO button is pushed (LED illuminated), the
Climate Control system automatically adjusts the follow-
ing settings in the corresponding zones:
• Quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the
passenger compartment.
• Climate Control system compressor.
• Air Recirculation.
Cancelling all previous manual adjustments.
This is indicated by the AUTO button LED turning on.
If the AUTO button is pushed when the AUTO LED is on,
the system changes to manual mode; it displays the
current flow and distribution status, which will no longer
be managed automatically.
If a manual adjustment is made to the air distribution, the
A/C button or the blower speed, the LED turns off to
indicate that the system is no longer controlling all
functions automatically.
To restore automatic system control after one or more
manual adjustments, push the AUTO button.
SYNC Button
Push the “SYNC” button (LED illuminated) to correlate
the passenger side air temperature with that of the driver
side.
This function makes temperature regulation easier when
the driver is travelling alone.
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the
passenger side temperature and return to separate air
temperature management.
Air Recirculation
The Air Recirculation is managed by the following:
• Forced activation (air recirculation always on): indi-
cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button.
• Forced deactivation (air recirculation always off, air
intake from the outside), signalled by the LED on the
Recirculation Control button switching off.
Forced activation/deactivation can be selected by push-
ing the Recirculation Control button.
When the On/Off button is pushed, the Climate Control
system automatically activates internal air recirculation
(LED on Recirculation Control button on).
In automatic operation, recirculation is managed auto-
matically by the system according to outside environ-
mental conditions.
NOTE:
• Use of the recirculation system makes it possible to
reach the required heating/cooling conditions faster. It
is not recommended to use it on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase the possibility of the
windows misting up inside (especially if the Climate
Control system is off). When the outside temperature
is low, recirculation is forced off (air drawn in from the
outside) to prevent the windows from misting up.
• It is not recommended to use internal air recirculation
when the outside temperature is low, since the win-
dows could mist up rapidly.
• When defrost mode is selected recirculation is turned
off to prevent the windows from misting up.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor has been
turned off, even after the engine has stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO MODE (AUTO
LED will turn off). To restore automatic control of com-
pressor, push the AUTO button again.
NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced
to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower
than the outside temperature. Under certain environmen-
tal conditions, windows could mist rapidly since the air
is not dehumidified.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob
counter-clockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and pas-
senger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO.
In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost function)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on) the
windshield and side window demisting function.
The Climate Control system carries out the following
operations:
• Turns on the air conditioning compressor when envi-
ronmental conditions are suitable.
• Turns air recirculation off.
• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers.
• Activates the heated rear window defrost.
• Activates the heated windshield (if equipped).
• Displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED
illuminated).
When the function is activated, the AUTO button LED
turns off. With the function activated, the only possible
manual adjustments are pushing the A/C control button,
adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear
window off.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are
pushed, the Climate Control system will deactivate the
Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
distribution activates the Climate Control system com-
pressor and the air recirculation is set to ⬙outside air⬙
intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows.
Max-defrost is also available in manual mode.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost
indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The
function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window de-
froster heating filaments do not affix stickers or other
objects to the inside of the rear glass.
Turning Off The Climate Control System
Push the ON/OFF button.
With the Climate Control system off:
• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passenger com-
partment from the outside.
• The A/C compressor is off.
• The blower is off.
• The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated.
NOTE: The Climate Control unit stores the temperatures
set before the system was turned off and restores them
when one of the following knobs/buttons is pushed:
• A/C
• Recirculation
• Max Defrost
• Blower Increase
• AUTO
To restart the Climate Control system in fully automatic
mode, push the AUTO button.
System Maintenance
In winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on
at least once a month for approximately 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which
does not pollute the environment in the event of acciden-
tal leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a
(refrigerant) allowed.
WINDOWS
Driver’s Door Controls
The power window switch is located on the driver’s door
panel. The driver’s power window switch controls the
operation of all the windows.
Power Window Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Left Front Window
2 — Opening/Closing Right Front Window
3 — Opening/Closing Right Rear Window
4 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear Doors)
5 — Opening/Closing Left Rear Window
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the MAR/RUN or AVV/START position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power
window switches will remain active for up to three
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the STOP/OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the MAR/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped The driver and passenger power window switches have
an AUTO-down feature. Push the switch for half a
second and release it; the window will go down auto-
matically.
To partially open the window, push the window switch
and release it when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly
when the when the window has reached the desired
position.
Push To Activate AUTO-Down Feature
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
If Equipped
Lift and hold the window switch for half a second,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To partially close the window, lift the window switch and
release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and
hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Lift To Activate AUTO-Up Feature
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reset AUTO-Up
Should the AUTO-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or par-
tially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows to-
gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is
operational and the rear one fixed) and is equipped with
two manual operated sun blinds, front and rear.
The power sunroof can be operated only with the ignition
key turned to the MAR/RUN position.
The power sunroof switches are located in the overhead
console.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key
Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible
to children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Operation Switch
1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
2 — Front Panel Vent Switch
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening The Sunroof
To retract the front panel to the open position, push the
Open/Close button and the sunroof will fully open. The
sunroof can be stopped in any position by pushing the
switch a second time while is opening.
Venting The Front Panel
To vent the sunroof push and hold the Vent switch.
NOTE: The vent switch has the automatic function only
at the opening of the roof, during the closing of the roof,
the expected functionality is only that manual.
Closing The Sunroof
To close the front panel completely, pull the sunroof
switch from the open position. The sunroof can be
stopped in any position by pulling the sunroof switch a
second time while it is closing.
NOTE: During the open/close or vent operation any
push on the switches will stop the closing of the panel.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sun Shade
The two sun shades is manually operated and can be
adjusted in any position.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
Anti-Pinch Safety Device
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Emergency Operation
If the power sunroof switch fails, the sunroof can be
operated manually as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap located on the inner lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key that is supplied in the tool bag
in the cargo area.
3. Insert the Allen Key into the key hole and turn it
clockwise to open the roof or counter-clockwise to
close.
Emergency Key And Key Hole
1 — Allen Key
2 — Key Hole
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When refitting sunroof, be careful to avoid fingers,
scarves, ties and items of clothing from getting
caught under the panel.
• Do not open the roof in the presence of snow or ice.
There is risk of damage.
Power Sunroof Relearn Procedure
As a result of any abnormal behavior of the roof or as a
result of an emergency operation, and you must relearn
the automatic operation of the sunroof.
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the Open/Close button to move the roof in the
fully closed position.
2. Bring the ignition to the STOP/OFF position and wait
for at least 10 seconds.
3. Bring the ignition to the position MAR/RUN.
4. Pull the Open/Close button and hold it for at least 10
seconds, after which you should feel the mechanical
stop of the electric motor of the roof.
5. Within 5 seconds, pull to close and hold the Open/
Close button, the roof makes a complete cycle of
opening and closing automatically (to indicate that the
relearn procedure has been successful). If this does not
happen and you need to repeat the procedure from the
beginning.
HOOD
Opening
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be re-
leased to open the hood.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers
side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passen-
ger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located
behind the center front edge of the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of the
hood.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch Location
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
• While lifting the hood, use both hands.
• Vehicle must be at a stop and the automatic transmis-
sion must be in park. Manual transmission vehicles
must have the electric park brake engaged.
Closing
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure
that the hood is completely closed.
Hood Prop System
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Support Rod
2 — Support Rod Seat
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIFTGATE
The Liftgate release function is disabled when the vehicle
is in motion.
Opening
Opening From Outside
To unlock the Liftgate from the outside, squeeze the
Electronic Liftgate Release and pull the Liftgate open
with one fluid motion.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When opening the door, the turn signal lights will flash
twice and the interior dome light will illuminate. The
interior dome light will turn off automatically by closing
the Liftgate. Refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle.”
If the Liftgate is left open, the interior dome light will
shut off after a few minutes to conserve battery life.
Internal Emergency Release
Proceed as follows:
1. Lower the headrests and tilt the seatbacks.
Electronic Liftgate Release
1 — Yellow Tab
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
2. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo
floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab.
3. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot to
trigger the release tab of the Liftgate.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and lower the liftgate.
NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate will be locked
automatically.
2 — Release Tab Slot
Liftgate Closing Handle
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be
adjusted as needed.
Position 1 (Floor Flush):
This position allows you to make the load floor flat for
ease of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area.
This position also makes it possible to use the space
below as another compartment for storing fragile or
smaller objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat is
folded flat, it will allow for loading objects of long
dimensions. It is recommended to use this position only
during the actual transporting of the objects, then bring
the load floor in position 1.
NOTE: With a full size spare, the floor will be at the
elevated position.
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed as
follows:
1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment.
3. Reposition the load floor.
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central position
with respect to cargo area.
Load Floor Handle
1 — Cargo Load Floor
2 — Cargo Load Floor Handle
Cargo Area Storage
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load from the lower to the upper position,
proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the load floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel guides
and on the rear cross member.
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container
carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove the floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the trim panels around
the cargo area floor, should be used to safely secure loads
when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo Box — If Equipped
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box that can
be used for the storage of objects that allows you to
obtain a uniform level when loading.
Tie-Downs
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE: The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of
distributed weight equal to 242 lbs (110 kg).
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Glove Compartments
The glove compartments is located on the passengers
side of the instrument panel.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, push in the button
located on the bottom side of the upper door. The door
will automatically open.
Cargo Box
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on
the latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Once the glove compartment is open, a light will turn on
to illuminate the compartment.
Upper Glove Compartment Button
Lower Glove Compartment Latch
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
NOTE:
• Do not insert objects in the glove compartments that
will not allow the compartment to fully close.
• The glove compartments should be completely closed
while the vehicle is in motion.
Sun Visors “Slide-On-Rod”
Sun visors are located on both sides of the rearview
mirror. The visors can be lowered or moved to the side to
help block sunlight from entering the windshield or door
glass.
To move the sun visor against the driver or passenger
door glass, remove the sun visor from the hook and turn
it toward the side window.
The visors also have illuminated vanity mirrors to allow
use in low light conditions.
Lift upward on the mirror cover to access the mirror.
Sun Visor Mirror Cover
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Extendible Sun Visor
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:
1. Place the sun visor against the door glass by detaching
it from the hook and turning it toward the side
window.
2. Slide the visor.
3. Slide out the sun visor extender.
Power Outlets
The front power outlet is located under the center stack of
the instrument panel. It only operates with the ignition in
the MAR/RUN position.
Fully Extended Sun Visor
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE: The power outlet can be changed to “battery”
powered all the time by switching the power outlet
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit fuse from
location F84 to F23.
Models equipped with the optional ⬙smoker kit,⬙ will
have a cigar lighter instead of the power outlet.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protect-
ing the system will need to be replaced.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
12 Volt Power Outlet
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Cigar Lighter — Optional
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through MOPAR parts. To ensure proper cigar
lighter operation, a MOPAR knob and element must be
used.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
The cigar lighter is located on the center console. Push
lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to
its initial position and is ready to be used.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protect-
ing the system will need to be replaced.
Cigar Lighter
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ashtray — If Equipped
NOTE: Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through MOPAR parts.
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be placed into
one of the cup holders.
Front Armrest
The front armrest is located between the front seats.
The armrest can be adjusted by moving it in the direction
indicated by the arrows.
Ashtray Location
Front Armrest Handle
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest to access
the storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Storage Compartment
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
Grab Handles
The Grab Handles are located immediately above the
doors. The rear handles are equipped with hooks for
dress hangers.
Front Cupholders
Rear Grab Handle Assembly
1 — Grab Handle
2 — Hook
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Luggage Rack
for transporting accessories.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the Roof Luggage Rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a authorized
dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do not in-
crease the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the
vehicle, plus the load on the Roof Luggage Rack, do not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Do not use the sunroof when using the crossbars.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the Roof Luggage Rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Roof rack cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads may
fall off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, re-
sulting in personal injury or property damage. Fol-
low the Roof Luggage Rack warnings and cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................158
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .160
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................160
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) ........................161
▫ EVIC Description......................161
▫ Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display
(EVIC) — If Equipped ..................162
▫ EVIC Control Buttons ..................164
▫ Engine Oil Change Reset ................165
▫ EVIC Main Menu .....................166
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER ......................174
▫ Quantities Displayed ...................175
▫ OK Button ..........................175
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......176
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............177
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............188
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............203
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............205
5
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Speedometer
• Indicates the speed of the car
2. Fuel Level Gauge
• The fuel gauge in the EVIC indicates the amount of
fuel left in the tank.
• The light comes on, together with a chime and the
display of a message in the EVIC, when the gas tank
has 1.5 to 2 gallons (5 to 7 liters) of fuel remaining.
3. EVIC Display
• The vehicle can be equipped with multifunctional
EVIC which offers useful information to the driver.
• With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the
key removed, for vehicles with mechanical key),
opening/closing of a door will activate the EVIC for
viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in
the odometer.
4. Engine Coolant Temperature
• The temperature gauge in the EVIC displays the
temperature of the engine coolant and starts provid-
ing indications when the coolant temperature ex-
ceeds approximately 122° F. In the normal use of the
car, the temperature gauge can move in different
directions based on the use of the car. The light
comes on, together with a chime and the display of a
message in the EVIC, to indicate an excessive in-
crease in the temperature of the engine coolant. Stop
the engine and contact you approved automotive
dealer.
5. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine RPM
NOTE: The illumination of the graphics on the instru-
ment cluster may vary according to the version (Mono-
color or Color display).
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 159
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
EVIC Description
The vehicle can be equipped with multifunctional dis-
play (EVIC) which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the key
removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 161
Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display (EVIC)
— If Equipped
The display shows the following information, if
equipped:
• Zone (1)
– Date (Centered)
– Compass (Centered)
– Time (Centered)
– External Temp. (Centered)
• Zone (2)
– Actual Gear Indication (Centered)
– PRND (Centered)
• Zone (3)
– Date (Centered)
– Compass (Centered)
– Time (Centered)
– External Temp. (Centered)
Mapping And Reconfigurable Zone Display
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Zone (4)
– Audio Info (Centered)
– Title (Centered)
– Title Number (Centered)
• Zone (4A)
– Title (Centered)
– Browsing Arrows (Left)
– Title Number (Right)
• Zone (4B)
– Title (Centered)
• Zone (4C)
– Title (Centered)
– Browsing Arrows (Left)
– Title Number (Right)
• Zone (5)
– Trip and Fuel Label (Left)
– Trip and Fuel Units (Left)
– Trip and Fuel Value (Right)
– Trip and Fuel Progress Bar (Centered)
– Text (Left)
• Zone (6)
– Odometer Digits (Left)
– Odometer Unit (Right)
– Cruise Control Speed Set (Center)
– Speed Buzzer (Right)
• Red Telltales (Left)
• Amber Telltales (Right)
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 163
EVIC Control Buttons
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Control Buttons
1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And Submenus
2 — Arrow Right/Left Access Information/Submenu Screens
3 — OK Button For Selecting And Resetting Information
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button
The OK button may be used for the following:
Select
Reset (hold)
Engine Oil Change Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the MAR/RUN
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 165
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the MAR/RUN position.
(do not start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the STOP/OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
EVIC Main Menu
The Main Menu is composed of several options that can
be selected using the control buttons above.
NOTE:
• The display mode of the menu items varies depending
on the type of display.
• For some items, a submenu is provided.
• In the Uconnect system, some items on the menu are
not shown on the instrument panel display.
EVIC Menu/Submenu Items
The Menu is composed of the following items:
• Trip
– Speedometer
– Instantaneous Info
– Trip A
– Trip B
– Best Consumption
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Drive Mode Selector
– Auto Mode
– Sport Mode
– Traction/All Weather Mode
• Vehicle Info
– Tire Pressure
– Oil Temperature
– Battery Voltage
• Driver Assist
– Lane Departure Warning
• Audio
• Navigation
• Messages
• Settings
– Display
– Units
– Clock & Date
– Security
– Safety & Assistance
– Lights
– Doors & Locks
Trip
This EVIC menu item allows you to view and select
information about the ⬙Trip computer⬙:
• Speedometer
– View and change the speedometer scale from MPH
to km/h (km/h to MPH).
• Instantaneous info
– View and change the distance (miles or km)
– View and change the instantaneous consumption
(mpg, or l/ 100km or km/l)
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 167
• Trip A
– View and change Trip A distance (miles or km)
– View and change travel time A (hours/minutes/
seconds
– View and change average consumption A (mpg, or
l/ 100km or km/l)
– View and change average speed A (MPH or km/h)
• Trip B
– View and change Trip B distance (miles or km)
– View and change travel time B (hours/minutes/
seconds
– View and change average consumption B (mpg, or
l/ 100km or km/l)
– View and change average speed B (MPH or km/h)
• Best Consumption
– Viewing directions of best consumption only avail-
able in Auto mode.
Drive Mode Selector
This EVIC menu/submenu items allows you to view and
select information about the ⬙Drive Mode⬙:
• Auto Mode
– Drive Style
– Instantaneous consumption
– Auto Mode Description
• Sport Mode
– Acceleration
– Turbo Boost or Engine Torque
– Sport Mode Description
• Traction/All Weather Mode
– 4x4/4x2 Percentage of Traction
– Traction Mode Description
– Temperature
– All Weather Mode Description
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Push
and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant
Temp will be displayed. Push the RIGHT
or LEFT
arrow button to scroll through the following infor-
mation displays:
• Tire pressure
– View the information relating to the TPMS system
(if equipped).
• Oil Temperature
– View the engine oil temperature.
• Battery Voltage
– View the voltage value (state of charge) of the
battery.
Driver Assist
This menu item allows you to change the settings (⬙No-
tice LaneSense⬙ and ⬙Intensity LaneSense⬙) relating to the
LaneSense system (if equipped).
• Notice LaneSense
• By selecting this function, you can select the ⬙readi-
ness⬙ of LaneSense, choosing between the options
⬙Near,⬙⬙Medium,⬙ or ⬙Far.⬙
• Intensity LaneSense
• Using this function, you can select the force applied to
the steering wheel to keep the car in the roadway
through the electrical drive system due to LaneSense.
Audio
This menu item allows you to view the instrument
cluster display and the information present on the dis-
play of the Uconnect system.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 169
The information displayed is:
• “Radio (AM or FM)”
• View Radio Station Name (if equipped), frequency,
and graphical icon
• ⬙MP3”
• Title display or number song playing
• ⬙USB⬙
• Title display or number song playing
• ⬙Ipod⬙
• Display song title (if equipped)
Messages (Stored)
This menu item allows you to display the information
messages/malfunction stored.
The background color of the display varies according to
the priorities of the failure:
• Failed Messages with low priority displays in yellow
• Failed Messages with high priority displays in red
Settings
This menu item allows you to change the settings for the
following:
• Display
• Units
• Clock and Date
• Security
• Safety and Assistance
• Lights
• Doors and Locks
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more
information.
Display
By selecting ⬙Display,⬙ you can access the following
settings:
• Screen Setup: Allows you to configure the display
screen.
• Language: Allows you to select the language in which
to display the information/warnings.
• Automatic Reset Trip B: Allows you to set the options
to reset the Trip B (never, always, every 2 hours or
every 8 hours);
• Phone Repetition: The instrument cluster display can
also display the information concerning phone mode.
The information that can be displayed is the connec-
tion status of the mobile phone (phone connected or
disconnected), the active telephone calls/incoming/on
hold, and the management of double calls (first incom-
ing second waiting, etc.).
• Navigation Repetition: Allows you to view, on the
instrument cluster display, information relating to the
navigation mode.
Units
By selecting the item ⬙Units Of Measure,” you can select
the unit of measure used in the display.
Possible options are:
• US
• Metric
• Custom
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 171
Clock and Date
By selecting the item ⬙clock and date,⬙ you can adjust the
clock.
Possible options are:
• Set Time: Adjust hours/minutes
• Set Format: Adjust the time format ⬙12h⬙ (12 hours) or
⬙24h⬙ (24 hours)
• Set Date: Adjust day/month/year
Security
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the
following adjustments:
• Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit (MPH
or km/h), which the driver is notified through a visual
and acoustic signaling (display of a message and a
symbol on the display).
• Seat Belt Buzzer: This function is only viewable when
the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active.
• Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill
Start Assist system.
Safety and Assistance
By selecting the item ⬙Safety & Assistance,⬙ you can make
the following adjustments:
• FCW: A selection of operating modes of the system
Forward Collision Warning Plus
• FCW Sensitivity: A selection of the ⬙readiness⬙ of
intervention of the Forward Collision Warning Plus
system, based on the distance to the obstacle
• ParkSense: A selection of the type of information
provided by ParkSense
• ParkSense Vol.: A selection of the volume of acoustic
signals provided by ParkSense
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Auto Wipers: Enabling/disabling the automatic opera-
tion of wipers in the event of rain
• LaneSense Warning: A selection of the ⬙readiness⬙ of
intervention of LaneSense
• Warning Buzzer Volume: Increase or decrease the
volume of the buzzer
• Maintenance Brakes — If Equipped: Activation of the
procedure to carry out braking system maintenance
• Auto Park Brake — If Equipped: Enable/disable auto-
insertion of the Electric Parking Brake
Lights
By selecting the item ⬙Lights,⬙ you can make the follow-
ing adjustments:
• Headlight Off Delay: Set the delay for headlight shut-
off after engine shutoff
• Headlight Sensor: Adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness
• Interior Ambient Lights: Increase of decrease the
brightness of the Interior Ambient Lights
• Greeting Lights: Enable/disable the vehicle’s Greeting
Lights
• Auto. High Beam: Activate/deactivate the automatic
main beam headlights — If Equipped
• Daytime Lights: Activate/deactivate the daytime run-
ning lights
• Cornering Lights: activate/deactivate the cornering
lights — If Equipped
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 173
Doors And Locks
By selecting the item ⬙Doors & Locks,⬙ you can make the
following adjustments:
• Auto Door Lock: Activate/deactivate the automatic
locking of the doors with the vehicle moving
• Auto Unlock On Exit: Automatic unlocking of the
doors when exiting the vehicle
• Flash Light With Lock: Activate the direction indica-
tors when closing the doors
• Sound Horn With Lock: Activate/deactivate the horn
when pushing the LOCK button on the RKE. The
options are ⬙Off,⬙⬙First Press,” and ⬙Second Press.⬙
• Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate the horn
at the Remote Starting of the engine with the RKE.
• Unlock On First Press Of Key Fob (vehicles without
Passive Entry): allows you to choose whether to un-
lock all the doors or only the driver’s side door on the
first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE
• Remote Door Unlock: Allows you to open the driver
door only on the first push of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE
• Passive Entry — If Equipped: Activate the automatic
locking of the doors
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip computer is used to display information on car
operation when the key is turned to the MAR/RUN
position.
This function allows you to define two separate trips
called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car’s ⬙complete
trips⬙ are monitored in an independent manner.
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new trip). To
perform a reset, push and hold the OK button on the
steering wheel controls.
“Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to:
• Distance Travelled
• Average Consumption
• Travel Time (driving time)
• Average Speed
Quantities Displayed
Distance Travelled
Indicates the distance travelled by the start of the new
trip.
Average Consumption
Represents the average fuel consumption since the start
of the new trip.
Average Speed
Represents the average speed since the start of the new trip.
Travel Time
Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
OK Button
Short Push Of The Button: display of various parameters.
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and begin a
new trip.
New trip
Starts after reset:
• ⬙Manual⬙ by pushing the OK button.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 175
• ⬙Automatic⬙ when the ⬙distance⬙ reaches the value is
62140 (99999.9 km) or when the ⬙time travel⬙ reaches
the value of 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes).
• After each disconnection and reconnection of the bat-
tery.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 177
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake ap-
plication. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the
brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 179
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 181
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this
case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minute
duration is expired, whichever comes first.
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
• Driver’s Door Open
• Passenger Door Open
• Driver and Passenger Door Open
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 183
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the EVIC and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the
engine.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 185
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to
ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 187
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems.
The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead
to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 189
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Wait To Start Light
The “Wait To Start” telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition
is turned to the RUN position. It’s duration may be longer based on colder operating condi-
tions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
NOTE: The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is
warm enough.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 191
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the Vehicle Security Alarm system has detected an
attempt was made to break into the vehicle.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until
the light turns off.
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 193
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to
refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical Data⬙ chapter, strictly com-
plying with the indications that you find there.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 195
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 197
Service Warning Indicator Light – If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Warning Indicator Light
The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals, refer to the
⬙Maintaining And Caring For your Vehicle⬙ chapter. This message is displayed automatically
along with the warning light when the key is turned to MAR-ON - 1242 miles (2,000 km)
before these deadlines and reappears every 124 miles (200 km). Below 124 miles (200 km)
servicing indications are more frequent. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers
according to the ⬙Unit Of Measurement⬙ settings. When the next scheduled service is ap-
proaching and the key is turned to MAR-ON, the word Service will appear on the display,
followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact a dedicated authorized dealer-
ship. The operations in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” will be performed and the message
will be reset.
198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 199
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 201
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the AVV/START position. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilo-
meters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to AVV/START.
• Each time the ignition is turned to AVV/START, the ESC system will be ON, even if it
was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Tell-
tale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as
selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 203
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
204 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights or
park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 205
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................209
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .210
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .210
▫ Brake System Warning Light..............210
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............210
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............212
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............212
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................213
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............215
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........216
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........218
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ...........219
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .........219
▫ Important Safety Precautions .............220
▫ Seat Belt Systems .....................221
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .......237
▫ Child Restraints ......................254
▫ Transporting Pets .....................274
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................274
▫ Transporting Passengers .................274
6
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal
travel during application and greater pedal force re-
quired to slow or stop the vehicle. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system,
the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on as the brake fluid
level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
6
SAFETY 209
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
210 SAFETY
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
(Continued)
6
SAFETY 211
WARNING! (Continued)
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
212 SAFETY
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
6
SAFETY 213
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
214 SAFETY
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Cluster” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in the “Multimedia” section for
further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
7.
Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
6
SAFETY 215
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
216 SAFETY
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
(Continued)
6
SAFETY 217
WARNING! (Continued)
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
(Continued)
218 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
6
SAFETY 219
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
220 SAFETY
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
6
SAFETY 221
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START or
MAR/ RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
222 SAFETY
Change Of Status
If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
6
SAFETY 223
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
224 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
(Continued)
6
SAFETY 225
WARNING! (Continued)
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
226 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
6
SAFETY 227
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Releasing The Seat Belt
228 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage Up
6
SAFETY 229
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Second Row Center Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center seat belt features a seat belt with
a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt
to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience
to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the
front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position on the seat.
Adjustable Anchorage Down
230 SAFETY
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
6
SAFETY 231
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into
the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt
will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-
latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed
position.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
232 SAFETY
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
6
SAFETY 233
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
234 SAFETY
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
6
SAFETY 235
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
236 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG”or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the
air bag covers.
6
SAFETY 237
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
238 SAFETY
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
6
SAFETY 239
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
240 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
6
SAFETY 241
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
242 SAFETY
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
6
SAFETY 243
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supple-
mental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
244 SAFETY
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
6
SAFETY 245
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a roll-
over or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side
246 SAFETY
Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of
the vehicle.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
6
SAFETY 247
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.
• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
248 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn Ignition OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch Must
Be Placed In Neutral
State).
2. Turn Ignition ON. Left Turn Light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Signal
Light BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
6
SAFETY 249
Customer Action Customer Will See
6. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
Is ON SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must Be Placed In
Neutral State).
Left Turn light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn Ignition OFF.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers
OFF (Manually).
System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
250 SAFETY
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the
light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
6
SAFETY 251
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
(Continued)
252 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
6
SAFETY 253
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
254 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-
da’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
6
SAFETY 255
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
256 SAFETY
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
6
SAFETY 257
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
258 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
6
SAFETY 259
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
260 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
6
SAFETY 261
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
— Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position
•
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
262 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the com-
bined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorage?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
6
SAFETY 263
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints may be removed in
every rear seating position.
264 SAFETY
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seatback, near the floor.
Lower Anchorage Location
6
SAFETY 265
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH:
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”
in this “Child Restraints” section for typical instal-
lation instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations
266 SAFETY
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6
SAFETY 267
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installa-
tion, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
268 SAFETY
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
= Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
SAFETY 269
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Yes The head restraints can be removed
in every rear seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
270 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
6
SAFETY 271
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
272 SAFETY
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations
6
SAFETY 273
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
274 SAFETY
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
6
SAFETY 275
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
276 SAFETY
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
6
SAFETY 277
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
278 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ................283
▫ Tip Start Feature ......................284
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................284
▫ Cold Weather Operation ................285
▫ Extended Park Starting..................286
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine . . . .287
▫ Stopping The Engine ...................287
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . . .288
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .288
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) ............289
▫ Auto Park Brake ......................293
▫ SafeHold ...........................294
▫ Brake Service Mode ....................295
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...............296
▫ Shifting.............................297
▫ Downshifting ........................298
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............301
▫ Gear Selector.........................303
▫ Gear Ranges .........................305
▫ Transmission Limp Home Mode ...........311
7
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............312
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System. . . .312
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .........313
▫ Activation...........................314
▫ Setting A Desired Speed .................314
▫ Deactivation .........................315
▫ Resume Speed........................315
▫ Varying The Speed.....................315
▫ Accelerating For Passing ................317
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .317
䡵 DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED ......317
▫ Warning Messages .....................318
䡵 BRAKE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .........319
▫ Brake Control ........................319
▫ Turning Brake Control ON Or OFF .........321
▫ Changing Brake Control Sensitivity .........321
▫ Brake Control Limited Warning............322
▫ Service Brake Control Warning ............323
▫
Precautions While Driving With Brake Control . .324
▫ General Information ...................327
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................328
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................328
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........330
▫ Service The Rear Park Assist System ........331
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........332
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............334
▫ LaneSense Operation ...................334
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............335
▫ LaneSense Warning Message..............335
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ..............339
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................340
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..............................342
▫ Base System .........................345
▫ General Information....................348
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................348
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine .....................348
▫ 2.4L Engine ..........................349
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................349
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............350
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......350
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................351
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................351
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................352
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............353
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................353
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................357
▫ Certification Label ....................357
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........359
▫ Acceleration .........................359
▫ Traction ............................360
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............360
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................360
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................361
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................362
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................363
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............363
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............367
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........368
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............369
▫ Towing Requirements ..................370
▫ Towing Tips .........................375
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ............377
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .377
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the MAR/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Manual Transmission
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the NEUTRAL position.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without pressing the
accelerator.
3. Cycle the ignition to the AVV/START position and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds before
attempting to restart the engine.
Automatic Transmission
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the accel-
erator.
3. Cycle the ignition to the AVV/START position and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds before
attempting to restart the engine.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the AVV/START position and release it. The
starter motor will continue to run but will automatically
disengage when the engine is running.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure,
and has not experienced an extended park condition as
identified in ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedure it may
be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the MAR/
RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Cold Weather Operation
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions
an externally powered electric block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is required for the
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
1.4L Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L
engine below -29°F (-34°C) and is recommended for the
2.4L engine below -20°F (-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -34°F (-35°C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The message
“plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster when the ambient temperature is below -4°F
(-20°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to
avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
Proceed as follows:
• Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced RPM,
without accelerating suddenly.
• It is recommended to wait until the engine coolant
temperature gauge starts to rise for maximum perfor-
mance.
Stopping The Engine
Vehicles Equipped With A Mechanical Key Fob:
To turn off the engine with, proceed as follows:
1. Park the car in a position that does not cause a traffic
hazard.
2. Place the transmission in gear (models with a manual
transmission) or place the transmission in PARK (P)
(models with automatic transmission).
3. With the engine idling, place the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition when the engine is
shut off.
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless Enter-
N-Go):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the START/STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the
ignition will be placed in the RUN position.
Turning Off the car (placing the ignition from the RUN
position to the STOP position), the power supply to the
accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN
will sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place
the ignition to STOP.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, the
window switches remains active for three minutes.
Opening a front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the tem-
perature inside the engine compartment to cool before
shutting off the engine.
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining And Caring
For Your Vehicle.”
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways;
• Manually, by pulling up on the park brake switch
momentarily to apply.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect Settings.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the
parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal
while you apply the EPB, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement. The EPB can be applied even
when the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position
but the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, how-
ever, it can only be released when the ignition switch is in
the MAR/RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB will
automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your
foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the EPB is engaging.
Electric Park Brake Switch
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
The EPB will be automatically released if the driver’s seat
belt is buckled and driver’s intention to start (in forward
or reverse direction) is recognized by the system
To release the EPB manually, the ignition switch must be
in the MAR/RUN position. Put your foot on the brake
pedal, then push the EPB switch down momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the EPB is fully disengaged, The BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
• When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the EPB
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The EPB should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
• If the clutch pedal is released at the same time the gas
pedal is pressed, the EPB will be automatically re-
leased (manual transmissions only).
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, maintain
upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The brake warning lamp could
illuminate in case of the hydraulic system is not available.
The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automati-
cally while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete
stop using the EPB, when the vehicle reaches approxi-
mately 1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake sys-
tem. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system,
a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be
accompanied by the Brake warning lamp flashing. In this
status some EPB functionalities may be deactivated. In
this event, urgent service of the EPB system is required.
Do not rely on the EPB to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is in
the STOP/OFF position. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the Customer
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) and the ignition is in the MAR/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured while the ignition switch is in MAR/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB Switch while the driver door is open and the brake
pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the STOP/OFF
position and back to MAR/RUN again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the
rear caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this
can only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The
actuator retraction can be done easily by entering the
Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings in
your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be disabled.
• The transmission must be in park or neutral.
• The EPB switch not activated.
• The vehicle in ignition MAR/ON position.
• The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is MAR/ON.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the EVIC if
Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the EVIC if
Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the floor and
put the gear selector to the desired position (the diagram
for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the
handle of the lever).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position
lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and
simultaneously move the lever to the left and then
forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
REVERSE Ring
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with clutch pedal depressed may result dam-
age to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear
and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to down-
shift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum
Speed
80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient nine-speed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To select a gear range, press
the lock button on the gear selector and move the lever
rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section).
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in RE-
VERSE. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine STOP/OFF, and remove the Key
Fob. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF (key
removal) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the MAR/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster
without the ⬙D⬙ indicator (i.e. as 1, 2, 3, etc. rather than
D1, D2, D3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To select a gear range, press
the gear selector lock button on the gear selector and
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or
to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this sec-
tion for further information). Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. The first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Gear Selector Lock Button
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park Brake (EPB) by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the EPB when leaving the vehicle in
this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the EPB.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the
transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmis-
sion locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Electric Parking Brake (EPB). Always apply the
EPB fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in RE-
VERSE. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
EPB, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When the
ignition is in the STOP/OFF (key removal) posi-
tion, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the MAR/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the STOP/OFF
position to the MAR/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, press the LOCK button on
the gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all
the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
Reverse (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Neutral (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the electric park brake and
shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Drive (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until the trans-
mission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing and many other situations.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward
and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select
the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear
selector forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward
(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
or second gear (depending on model) when coming to
a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift
(+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first or second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snow or
icy conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or rear-
ward to select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is electronically monitored for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the STOP/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go:
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the STOP/OFF
position. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK when-
ever the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position.
Vehicles With Mechanical Key:
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the STOP/OFF (key
removal) position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position,
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the STOP/OFF position.
If the vehicle’s battery becomes discharged, the key will
be trapped in the ignition switch even when the gear
selector is in PARK. To extract the key, refer to “Ignition
Key Removal Override” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the trans-
mission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned
to the MAR/RUN position (engine running or not) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the
button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
Activation
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Speed Control.
The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To turn the
system OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelera-
tor and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, ESC intervention, Forward collision mitigation,
Electronic Park Brake Intervention, or normal brake pres-
sure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
Varying The Speed
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Accelerating For Passing
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED
The Dynamic Selector combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to
provide the best performance in all driving conditions.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
The Dynamic Selector consists of the following positions:
Auto Mode – This mode is designed for comfort and
safety in normal driving conditions. In versions equipped
with all-wheel drive this mode also reduces fuel con-
sumption, as automatically alters the distribution of
torque between the front and rear axle.
All Weather Mode – This mode offers increased traction
control and stability control for low traction conditions
such as driving on a dirt road or off road as well as wet
and slippery roads.
Sport Mode – This mode is designed to increase steering
feedback to the driver with a slight increase in effort and
changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggres-
sive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving
on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired
in spirited cornering.
Warning Messages
In the event of a system fault, the system automatically
defaults to ⬙Auto⬙ mode and a message will appear in the
EVIC display.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Cluster” for fur-
ther information.
Dynamic Selector Switch
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Brake Control
The Brake Control system with mitigation provides the
driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within
the EVIC), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
and limited braking are intended to provide the driver
with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
• Brake Control monitors the information from the for-
ward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines that a
forward collision is probable, the driver will be pro-
vided with audible and visual warnings and may
provide a brake jerk warning.
• If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the
system determines that the driver intends to avoid the
collision by braking but has not applied sufficient
brake force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the end of
the intervention of automatic braking, the engine could
stall, unless the driver can depress the clutch pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the end of
the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission
may remain in last gear stored: therefore the car could
lurch forward, once the brakes release a few seconds
later. If the Brake Control event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
If a Brake Control event begins at a speed below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum brak-
ing possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If
the Brake Control event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for Brake Control activation is
4 mph (7 km/h).
• The maximum speed for Brake Control activation is
124 mph (200 km/h).
• The Brake Control alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts
based on the course prediction. This is expected and is
a part of normal Brake Control activation and func-
tionality.
• The Brake Control system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the Brake Control
system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary
warnings to the surroundings.
Brake Control Message
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The active braking is enabled only if the front seat belts
are fastened.
WARNING!
Brake Control is not intended to avoid a collision on
its own, nor can Brake Control detect every type of
potential collision. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning Brake Control ON Or OFF
The Brake Control menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE: The default status of Brake Control is “Warning +
Active Braking,” this allows the system to warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and
enable the active braking.
• Changing the Brake Control status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible collision
• Changing the Brake Control status to “Only warning”
prevents the system from providing limited active
braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual warn-
ings.
Changing the status of the system is only possible with
the vehicle at a complete stop.
NOTE: The Brake Control system state is not kept in
memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is
turned OFF, it will turn On when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing Brake Control Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect
system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
choosing one of the following three options: ⬙Near⬙,
⬙Medium⬙ or ⬙Far⬙. Refer to “Multimedia” for further
information.
The default option is ⬙Medium⬙. This setting provides
that the system notify the driver of a possible accident
with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is at a
standard distance, intermediate between the other two
possible settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to ⬙Far⬙, the
system will warn the driver of a possible accident with
the vehicle in front when the latter is at a greater distance,
giving you the chance to act on the brakes in a more
limited and gradual. This setting gives the driver the
maximum possible time of reaction to prevent a possible
accident.
By changing the option to ⬙Near⬙, the system will warn
the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of
it when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers
a reaction time to the driver lower than the settings
⬙Medium⬙ and ⬙Far⬙, in the case of a potential accident,
while a more dynamic driving of the car.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained
in memory when the engine is switched off.
Brake Control Limited Warning
If the EVIC displays “Brake Control Limited Functional-
ity” or “Brake Control Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits Brake Control functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service Brake Control Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
• Brake Control Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display when conditions tempo-
rarily limit system performance. This most often occurs
at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain.
The system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
EVIC will display “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor
Temporarily Blocked” and the system will deactivate.
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflec-
tive tiles, or ice and snow). The system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the lower
grille. In absence of visible obstructions on the bumper, it
could be necessary to wipe off the radar directly on the
surface, after having the radar cover removed. It’s rec-
ommended that your authorized dealer perform’s this
operation.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
NOTE:
• If the “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Brake Control operation.
Precautions While Driving With Brake Control
In certain driving conditions, such as:
• Driving in the vicinity of a curve
• Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
• Lane changing of other vehicles
• Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be unexpected or
delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular
attention, while maintaining control of the car to drive in
complete safety.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could detect
the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the car, but that
does not preside in the same lane. In cases such as this,
the system might respond.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles
that are in front of the car but placed outside the field of
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react in
the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or motor-
cycles.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while standing in the
traffic lane of their car and inside the field of action of the
radar sensor may cause the intervention of the system.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that
crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an oncoming
intersection.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the MAR/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 59
in (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
Parking Sensors
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Chime
By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the case of the
presence of a rear obstacle, an acoustic signal that varies
with the distance of the obstacle from the bumper is
activated.
The frequency of the acoustic signal:
• Increases with the distance between car and object
decreases.
• Becomes continuous when the distance that separates
the car from the obstacle is less than approximately 12
inches (30 cm), while terminates immediately if the
distance to the obstacle increases.
• Remains constant if the distance between car and
obstacle remains unchanged. If this situation occurs
for the side sensors, the signal is stopped after approxi-
mately three seconds to avoid, for example, it activates
in case of maneuver along a wall.
When the system emits a beeping sound, the volume of
the Uconnect system, if turned on, is automatically
lowered by ParkSense.
Detection Distances
If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is taken into
account only what is the shorter distance.
Instrument Cluster Display
ParkSense is displayed on the instrument cluster only if
you have selected the item ⬙sound and display⬙ inside the
⬙Settings⬙ menu of the Uconnect system.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
In general, the car is closest to the obstacle when the
display shows only a flashing arc and the chime becomes
continuous.
The color on the display depends on the distance and
location of the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to dis-
able the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
ParkSense will remember the previous state when the
vehicle is switch off.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After turning off the ignition, the ParkSense remains
in this setting until the next key cycle, even in the
case of changing the setting of starting MAR/RUN to
STOP/OFF and then again in MAR/RUN.
Service The Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARK ASSIST
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARK
ASSIST UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Cluster” for fur-
ther information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condi-
tion, the EVIC will display the ⬙PARK ASSIST UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, Rear
Park Assist will not operate.
If “PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear ParkSense.
• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear ParkSense system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Park-
ing curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the EVIC to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
vided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the end of the turn
signal stalk located on the steering column.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the Lane
Assist button (LED turns OFF). A “Lane Sense
On” message is shown in the EVIC.
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the Lane Assist
button once (LED turns ON).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
3.5 EVIC Screen
When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the Lane Assist
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.).
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to
see an on-screen image of your vehicle’s rear surround-
ings when the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along
with a note to “check entire surroundings” across the top
of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
Parking Camera
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the STOP/OFF position.
A touchscreen button to disable the camera is available
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE. Display of the
camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be
disabled via Uconnect Settings.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven,
this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F
(20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire”
text message will display when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text mes-
sage will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following sce-
narios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87 using the
(R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance and fuel
economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
2.4L Engine
All available gasoline engines are designed
to meet all emissions regulations and pro-
vide excellent fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high quality unleaded
“regular” gasoline having a octane rating
of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler
pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically
upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.
The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents
the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Opening The Door
For filling proceed as follows:
1. Open the door, by pushing and releasing on the
indentation point indicated by the arrow.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and proceed
with filling the fuel tank.
3. Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds to
allow the fuel to flow inside of the tank.
4. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the
door.
Fuel Filler Door
Filler Pipe
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Refueling Procedure
If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate and remove the emergency fuel fill
funnel located in the cargo area.
2. Open the fuel door.
3. Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the filler pipe
and proceed to fill the fuel tank.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel — If Equipped With Full
Size Spare Tire
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
4. Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and close the
door.
5. Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler
neck other than is provided on the car.
• The use of objects/plugs do not comply with the
vehicle and may cause pressure increases inside the
tank, creating dangerous conditions.
• Do not approach the neck of the tank with open
flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire hazard.
Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with
your face, do not inhale harmful vapors.
• Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of the
pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk of fire.
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates
that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC) in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Cluster” for further
information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily
until the over temperature condition no longer exists.
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Cluster” for further
information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
1.4L Turbo Engine & 2.4 FWD
Trailer towing is not recommended.
Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
2.4L AWD 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
ALL-WHEEL
DRIVE (AWD)
TOWING
CONDITION
WHEELS OFF THE
GROUND
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL/
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
NOTE: You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature
is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the Customer
Programmable Features in the Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the trans-
mission in PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
• Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Turn the ignition to the MAR/RUN position, but do
not start the engine.
• Press and hold the brake pedal.
• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
• Turn the engine OFF, remove the key or fob, and
release the brake pedal.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle
may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all
four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
7
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........383
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ...................383
▫ General Information....................383
▫ Replacement Bulbs ....................384
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ................386
▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs .................397
䡵 FUSES ...............................403
▫ General Information....................404
▫ Access To The Fuses ...................406
▫
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit . .406
▫ Body Computer Fuse Center..............413
▫ Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit.....416
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........417
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage — If
Equipped ...........................418
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................421
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................422
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................429
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE ..............430
▫ Tire Service Kit — If Equipped ............431
8
䡵 JUMP STARTING ......................435
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ..............436
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ................437
䡵 Enhanced Accident Response System .........439
▫ ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM RESET PROCEDURE ............440
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .............441
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............441
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............443
䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE .......445
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............447
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........450
▫ Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ..........452
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ...........452
䡵 TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED..........453
▫ Front Tow Eye Installation ...............455
▫ Rear Tow Eye Installation ................456
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
• Before you replace a bulb check the contacts to be sure
they are not oxidized.
• Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
• After replacing a light bulb always check the correct
orientation.
• Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning check
that the fuse is intact.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Box) W5W
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps HIR2
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) P21/5
Front Direction Indicator Lamps PY21W
Front Fog Lamps H8
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) WY5W
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Reverse P21W
License Plate Lamp W5W
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove the head-
lamp bulb cap.
Front Lamps
1 — Headlamps
2 — Daytime Running Lamps
3 — Directional Indicators
4 — Fog Lamps — If Equipped
Headlamp Bulb Cap
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise
then pull outwards.
3. Release the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connec-
tor and remove the bulb and socket.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is
properly locked.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
Headlamp Bulb Connector
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; align the tabs
and turn it clockwise making sure it is properly
locked.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with
the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold,
to avoid the danger of burns.
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Headlamp Bulb Connector
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. Rotate in a counterclockwise direction and remove the
bulb and bulb socket.
5. To replace the bulb gently push bulb and rotate
counterclockwise.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog light Access
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
1 — DRL Bulb Socket
2 — Turn Signal Bulb Socket
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
6. Insert the new bulb by pushing on it and turning it
clockwise. Make sure the bulb is correctly locked in
place.
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clockwise,
making sure that it is properly locked.
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Reinstall the access door.
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Bulb and Socket Assembly
1 — Bulb
2 — Rotate Bulb
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the
bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb
is locked into place.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
Fog Light Assembly
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors –
(If Equipped)
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the
replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you
contact your authorized dealer.
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1.
Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view mirror.
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
Mirror Cap
1 — Mirror Cover
2 — Side Indicator Lens
3 — Side Indicator Bulb Location
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the transparent
lens assembly by rotating the socket counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the
bulb straight out.
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into
place
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror,
making sure it is locked into place.
Rear Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
• Position lights
• Stop lights
• Direction indicator
• REVERSE lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the tail lamp housing
screws as shown.
Tail Lamp Removal
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
3. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward the
outside as shown.
4. Remove the screws and remove the rear tail lamp
holder.
5. Replace the bulb as necessary.
Tail Lamp Removal
Rear Lamp Assembly
1 — Screws
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
7. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear tail lamp
housing, tightening the screws.
8. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the vehicle.
9. Secure the rear tail lamp and reconnect the electrical
connector.
10. Finally close the liftgate.
3th Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement see your
authorized dealer.
Rear Tail Lamp Holder
1 — Running/Stop Lamp
2 — Direction Indicator Bulb
3 — Running/Stop Lamp
4 — Reverse Bulb
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
License Plate Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.
2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are properly
locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
License Plate Light Location
License Plate Light
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: If removal the license plate lens using a suitable
tool, be sure to cover the tip of the suitable with a cloth so
no damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle paint.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light as
shown.
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.
Front Courtesy Light Housing
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb
housing.
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light hous-
ing making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is
properly locked.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor
mirror light cover.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts,
and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
properly locked between the contacts.
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that
it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
Visor Mirror Cover
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment;
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at both
the ends.
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
Bulb Removal/Installation
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown remove the
dome light.
Rear Dome Light
Retractable Roof Light
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove the dome
light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Bulb
Light Cover
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.
WARNING!
• Before proceeding with the replacement of the
lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER
OF BURNS!
• Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into ac-
count the technical characteristics can cause mal-
functions with the risk of fire.
• Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
• Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
contact with the fingers, reduces the intensity of
the emitted light and you can also affect the life of
the lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb
with a cloth dampened with alcohol and allow to
dry.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
(Continued)
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
WARNING! (Continued)
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Also please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Fuse Removal
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse
cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment
fuse cover.
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
Fuse Extractor Location
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the
engine compartment, under the instrument panel and on
the inside of the left side cargo trim panel.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Engine Compartment Fuse Cavities
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Fuse Panel And Cover Location
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide com-
pletely from top to bottom.
2. Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver
supplied.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartage Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body
Computer
F02 60 Amp Blue – – Module Body
Computer, Rear
Distribution Units
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power
Supply Body
Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control
Electronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-
Assisted Steering
F06 20 Amp Yellow – – Engine Cooling fan
F07 50 Amp Red – – Engine Cooling fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic
Transmission, GSM
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartage Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module
Engine
F10 – – 10 Amp Red Horn
F11 – – 10 Amp Red Supply Secondary
Loads
F14 – – 5 Amp Tan Pump Power ⬙
After run⬙
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control
Module Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control
Module Power, Auto-
matic Transmission
F17 – – 10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Supply Primary Loads
(1.4L)
Supply Primary Loads
(2.4L)
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartage Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F18 – – 30 Amp Green Power All-Wheel
Drive
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner
Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power
Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – – 20 Amp Yelow Power Control Module
Engine
F23 – – 20 Amp Yellow
(Customer Installed)
Power Outlet
(Battery Powered)
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit
Supply Automatic
Transmission
F30 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield –
If Equipped
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartage Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
(Ignition Powered)
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Auto-
matic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside
Mirrors
F89 – 30 Amp Pink – Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery
State of Charge)
412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering
column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see your authorized dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Fan Air Conditioning, Power Socket
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Drivers Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear lateral ceiling light
in case of open roof, EOBD port
F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC,
Central stack switches, Brake Pedal Switch (NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 7.5 Amp Brown BSM - Brake Control Module, EPS - Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Internal Electocromic Mirror,
Heated Front Seats
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning Compressor, Plaque Automatic Transmission, Rear Camera,
Air Conditioning, LDW - Lane Departure Warning, ASS - Auxiliary Stack
Switch, DSU - Drive Syle Selector Unit, Reverse gear switch, side mirrors and
rear window defrost
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter-N-Go, Brake Pedal Switch
(NA), EPB - Electric Parking Brake
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left
rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Push on the left side of the access door to unhinge and
remove.
Access Door Location
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F2 20 Amp Yellow Audio System
F3 20 Amp Yellow Electric Sunroof
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (driver side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Seat (driver side) Lumbar Adjustment
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped
The jack and tools are located in the rear storage com-
partment if equipped, inside a special container.
Jack And Tools Location
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Load Floor Handle
Spare Tire Fastener
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
4.
Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench, and wheel chocks.
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Jack And Tools
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chock
5 — Screwdriver
6 — Emergency Allen Key
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition off to the STOP/OFF position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Apply the parking brake and place an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers
the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclock-
wise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
Loosen The Wheel Bolt
Jacking Locations
424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location Front Jacking Engagement Point
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
Rear Jacking Location Rear Jacking Engagement Point
426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 427
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare
tire or a limited — use spare tire. For further infor-
mation refer to “Tires — General Information” in
“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle”.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel
bolt wrench counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for the
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
428 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in the “Technical Data” sec-
tion for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 429
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Stow the jack and tools back in the proper
storage location. Release the Electric Park Brake before
driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage com-
partment inside a storage container. Located inside the
container are a screwdriver and the emergency fuel
funnel. To access the Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and
remove the load floor.
Tire Service Kit Location
430 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency
repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear
storage compartment inside the storage container.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw
the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Power Button
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Sealant Bottle
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 431
WARNING! (Continued)
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
432 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.
The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air
will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle
30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the
sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure.
If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
Authorized Dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph
(110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an Authorized Dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 433
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire has
been treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
tion date at your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture
and serious injury or death.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
434 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 435
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Battery Posts
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
436 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (manual transmission in NEU-
TRAL) and turn the ignition to STOP/OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is STOP/
OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 437
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in serious injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
438 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights
can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention
of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 439
• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
RESET PROCEDURE
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn Ignition OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch Must
Be Placed In Neutral
State).
2. Turn Ignition ON. Left Turn Light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Signal
Light BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
440 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Customer Action Customer Will See
6. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
Is ON SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must Be Placed In
Neutral State).
Left Turn light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn Ignition OFF.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers
OFF (Manually).
System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is de-
scribed in the “Emergency Refueling Procedure”. Refer to
“Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 441
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
442 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If
a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector bezel and boot
assembly from the center console.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 443
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right front
corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and
hold the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector bezel.
Removing Gear Selector Bezel
Gear Selector Override Location
444 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the STOP/
OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually,
proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the vehicle is in a safe location and set the
Electric Park Brake.
2. Unlock the steering column, and pull the tilt/
telescoping control handle down.
3. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of
the travel position, then lock the steering column in
position and push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
4. Using the special tool supplied (located in the tool
bag), remove the screws in the lower steering column
trim cover and remove it.
Special Tool
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 445
5. With one hand, pull down on the release tab and with
the other, pull out the ignition key.
Lower Steering Column Cover
1 — Trim Screws
Release Tab Location
446 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column
cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,
push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with
automatic transmission) or 2ND GEAR and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
Release Tab Direction
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 447
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
448 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 449
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
FWD MODELS ALL WHEEL DRIVE
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL
TRANSMISSION AWD
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift
or Dolly
Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
450 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the MAR/
RUN position.
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the
ignition in the MAR/RUN position, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK so that the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 451
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
452 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be used
to tow a disabled vehicle.
When using a tow eye be sure to follow the “Tow Eye
Usage Precautions” and the “Towing A Disabled Vehicle”
instructions in this section.
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tow eye is properly seated and secure
in the mounting receptacle.
• The tow eye is recommended for use with an approved
tow bar and or rope.
• Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
• Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to
“Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in this section for further
information.
Tow Eye
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 453
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.
• Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may
break, causing serious injury or death.
• Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps
may break or become disengaged, causing serious
injury or death.
• Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury or
death.
Tow Eye Warning Label
454 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside
assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an
appropriate device in accordance with the highway
code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for
a short distance to the nearest service location.
• Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off
the road or where there are obstacles.
• In compliance with the above conditions, towing
with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles
(one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as
possible along the same center line. Damage to
your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not
followed.
Front Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a access
door, located on the right front bumper fascia. To install
the tow eye, open the access door using the vehicle key or
a small screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into the
receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye and
tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for further
information. The tow eye must be fully seated to the
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 455
attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as
shown. If the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching
bracket, the vehicle should not be towed.
Rear Tow Eye Installation
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a access
door on the rear bumper fascia.
To install the tow eye, open the access door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow
eye into the receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye and
tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for further
information. The tow eye must be fully seated to the
Front Tow Eye Installation
1 — Access Door
2—TowEye
456 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
attaching bracket through the lower rear fascia. If the tow
eye is not fully seated to the attaching bracket, the vehicle
should not be towed.
Rear Tow Eye Installation
1 — Access Door
2—TowEye
8
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 457
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................462
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................463
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................464
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ..............464
▫ Maintenance Chart.....................466
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
ENGINE .............................476
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ENGINE. . . .477
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........478
▫ Engine Oil ..........................479
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................481
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................481
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............482
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............484
▫ Body Lubrication .....................485
▫ Wiper Blades ........................486
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................488
▫ Exhaust System ......................489
▫ Cooling System ......................491
9
▫ Brake System ........................497
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......500
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....500
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................502
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE .................510
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............512
▫ Tire Markings ........................512
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........515
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........517
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........518
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........523
▫ Tire Pressure ........................523
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................525
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .526
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................527
▫ Tire Types ...........................527
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............529
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............530
▫ Tire Spinning ........................530
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................530
▫ Life Of Tire .........................531
▫ Replacement Tires .....................532
460 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
462 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-
signed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine
parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 463
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument clus-
ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
464 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Cluster” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated
predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
NOTE: The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 465
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road
conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
466 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check tire condition/wear and
adjust pressure, if necessary,
check TIREKIT expiration date
(if provided).
•••••••••••••••
Check operation of lighting
system (headlamps, direction
indicators, hazard warning
lights, luggage compartment,
passenger compartment,
glove compartment, instru-
ment panel warning lights,
etc.).
•••••••••••••••
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 467
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check and, if necessary, top
up fluid levels (brakes/
hydraulic clutch, windshield
washer, battery, engine cool-
ant, etc.).
•••••••••••••••
Check engine control system
operation (via diagnostic tool).
•••••••••••••••
468 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Visually inspect condition of:
exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses
(exhaust - fuel system -
brakes), rubber elements
(boots, sleeves, bushings,
etc.).
•••• • • •
Check windshield/rear window
wiper blade position/wear.
•• ••• • • •
Check operation of windshield
washer system and adjust jets
if necessary.
•• ••• • • •
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 469
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check cleanliness of hood
and tailgate locks and cleanli-
ness and lubrication of link-
ages.
•• ••• • • •
Visually check the condition
and wear of the front and rear
brakes.
•••••••••••••••
Check the front suspension,
tie rods, CV joints and replace
if necessary.
•••• • • •
Visual inspect the condition of
the accessory drive belt.
•• •
470 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check the tension of the
accessory drive belt.
•••• • • •
Replace the accessory drive
belt.
•
Inspect and replace PCV
valve if necessary.
•
Change engine oil and replace
oil filter. *
In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage,
whichever occurs first.
Inspect the PTU fluid level. •• •
Inspect the rear differential
fluid level.
•• •
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 471
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs
(1.4L Turbo engine). **
••• • •
Replace spark plugs
(2.4L engine). **
•
Replace engine air filter. # ••• • •
Replace brake fluid every two
years.
•••• • • •
Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○
472 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the manual transmis-
sion fluid if using your vehicle
for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi,
police, delivery service (com-
mercial service), off-road, des-
ert operation or more than
50% of your driving is at sus-
tained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
••
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
••
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 473
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace the timing belt
(1.4L Turbo Engine).
•
䡩 Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
# The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil
change if used in dusty areas.
* The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out
when indicated by a warning light or message on the
instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year
or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
** The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly
intervals do not apply. The following are essential to
ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to
the engine:
• Only use spark plugs of the same make and type
which are specially certified for such engines (refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Technical
Data” for further information).
474 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
• Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement inter-
val given in the “Maintenance Chart” for spark plug
replacement.
• Contact your authorized dealer if you have any ques-
tions.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 475
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO ENGINE
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Oil Fill Cap
476 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Battery 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 477
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
478 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil
level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine
is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level between the range mark-
ings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a
crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when
the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will
result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 479
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for tur-
bocharged engines under all types of operating condi-
tions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends 0W-20 engine oils that are API Certified and
meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo
Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil is recommended
for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves
low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine
oil viscosity grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine
oil viscosity grade for your engine.
480 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 481
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in the “In Case Of
Emergency” section for further information.
(Continued)
482 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 483
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
484 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See your Authorized Dealer for service.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 485
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed
in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily
changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy the wipers must
be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two minutes after
the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.
486 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least
half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position command,
the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to
a maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is dis-
abled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• Turn the ignition to the MAR/RUN position.
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
• Two minutes timer has expired after turning the
ignition OFF.
NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up the and remove it.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 487
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper
blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards the
liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the
wiper blade holder on the wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
1—WiperBlade
2 — Release Button
3—WiperArm
488 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for fur-
ther information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in the
“Safety” section for further information.
(Continued)
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 489
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
490 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 491
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in the
“Technical Data” section for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
(Continued)
492 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 493
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
494 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 495
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
496 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 497
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in the
“Technical Data” section for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
the “Technical Data” section for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle
is also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
498 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 499
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Technical Data” for fluid specifications. It is important
to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
500 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Technical Data” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 501
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
502 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 503
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If the engine compartment is washed with an high
pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches
(20 centimeters) from filler surface.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
504 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 505
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
506 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 507
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
508 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 509
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
a your authorized dealer or service station.
The vehicle lifting points on the vehicle are marked on
side skirts with symbols (
see example shown).
510 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Lifting Point Locations
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 511
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
512 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 513
EXAMPLE:
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
514 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 515
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
516 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 517
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
518 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 519
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
520 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 521
522 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 523
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
524 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 525
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
526 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 527
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
528 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 529
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
530 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 531
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
532 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 533
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, on a 215/60 R16 and 215/55
R17, use reduced size snow chains or traction devices
with a maximum projection of 9 mm beyond the tire
profile
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
534 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 535
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
method is the “forward cross” shown in the following
diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
536 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly;
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every thirty days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying pro-
tective waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper
blades and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking
care not to damage the painted surface by dragging
across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which
will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on
the surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) is
higher than recommended on the tire placard and
check it periodically.
9
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 537
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, run the at engine idling and for
approximately five minutes, with the air conditioning
system on and high fan speed. This will ensure a
proper lubrication of the system, thus minimizing the
possibility of damage to the compressor when the
vehicle is put back into operation.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting The
Engine” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative termi-
nals to the battery, wait at least a minute with
ignition switch in the OFF position and close the
drivers door. When reconnecting the positive and
negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is
closed.
538 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
TECHNICAL DATA
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER .......540
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................541
▫ Torque Specifications ...................541
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................543
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
GENUINE PARTS ......................544
▫ Engine .............................544
▫ Chassis ............................545
10
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The chassis number (VIN) and stamped on the plate
illustrated in, located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel cover, visible from the outside vehicle
through the windshield.
This number is also stamped on the floor of the passenger
compartment, in front of the right front seat.
The stamp includes:
• Type of the vehicle
• Sequential production number of the chassis
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
540 TECHNICAL DATA
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m) M12 x 1.25 x
25.5
17 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
10
TECHNICAL DATA 541
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Torque Patterns
542 TECHNICAL DATA
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4.0 Quarts 3.8 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
2.4L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
10
TECHNICAL DATA 543
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
544 TECHNICAL DATA
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended, 87 Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C Series Manual &
Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use MOPAR Front Axle/PTU
Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use MOPAR Rear Axle/RDM
Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
10
TECHNICAL DATA 545
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................549
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................550
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................552
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............552
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Settings ..................552
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 6.5AN Settings ................567
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ...................583
䡵 USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................584
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......585
▫ Radio Operation ......................586
▫ Media Mode .........................586
䡵
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .586
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information .........587
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................588
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................588
▫ Get Started ..........................589
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................591
11
▫ Radio ..............................592
▫ Media..............................594
▫ Phone..............................595
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................597
▫ Navigation (6.5AN) ....................598
▫ General Information....................599
▫ Additional Information .................599
548 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-
tems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of
vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
•
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
(Continued)
11
MULTIMEDIA 549
WARNING! (Continued)
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-
agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Cluster”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
550 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 6.5AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
11
MULTIMEDIA 551
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings
Push the Settings
button on the faceplate, to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access programmable features
that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice,
Clock & Date, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth,
Radio Setup, Restore Settings and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
552 MULTIMEDIA
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “ AVV/START ” position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen.
• Brightness
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the
brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the
touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be-
tween the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
11
MULTIMEDIA 553
• Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Español/Français) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press
the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID). The following select-
able units of measure are listed below:
• US
Changes the EVIC/DID to US units of measure.
• Metric
Changes the EVIC/DID to Metric units of measure.
• Custom
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km”
or “km/L.”
554 MULTIMEDIA
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Long.”
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Command
List settings. To change the Show Command List settings,
press the “Show Command List” button on the touchscreen
and select from “Always,” “With Help” or “Never.”
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Set Time and Format
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then
choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the
corresponding arrow above and below the current time
to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
• Show Time Status
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
11
MULTIMEDIA 555
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press
the corresponding arrows above and below the current
date to adjust.
• Sync Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.
Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and
select from “ON” or “OFF.”
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “+ MORE”
button on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the
ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
556 MULTIMEDIA
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
• ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If
Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW+
is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of
a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW+ status, press
and release the “Near” or “Far” button.
• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active
Braking — If Equipped
The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist
(ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward
collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure
when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to
avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system
becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
11
MULTIMEDIA 557
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+) With Mitigation” in “Safety.”
• ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button.
Refer to “ParkSense” in “Starting And Operating” for
system function and operating information.
• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC or Uconnect System (if equipped). The
chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC or Uconnect System (if equipped). The
chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Starting and
Operating” for system function and operating information.
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
zone start point.
558 MULTIMEDIA
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
(LDW)” in “Starting and Operating.”
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Starting and Operating.”
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
BSM not operating to specification.
11
MULTIMEDIA 559
• Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Sensitivity
When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight
Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels:
Level 1 = minimum sensitivity
Level 2 = medium sensitivity
Level 3 = maximum sensitivity
NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the exter-
nal light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with
a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier
than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensi-
tivity setting, press the “1,” “2” or “3” button on the
touchscreen to select your desired Headlight Sensitivity
level.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating
that the setting has been selected.
560 MULTIMEDIA
• Greeting Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the greeting lights
to be turned On or Off. To change the Greeting Lights
setting, press the “On” or “Off” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired Greeting Light setting.
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, then select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the DRL will turn on while
the engine is running. To make your selection, press the
“Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen,
then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will highlight
indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Cornering Lights
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel
rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,
a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the
relevant side to improve visibility at night. To change the
Cornering Lights setting, press the “On” or “Off” button
on the touchscreen to select your desired Cornering
Lights setting.
• Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or
“Off.”
11
MULTIMEDIA 561
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
on Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Lock button
is pressed. To make your selection, press the “Horn
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from
⬙Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press”
562 MULTIMEDIA
• Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped
Press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the horn will sound when the remote start is
activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn
With Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select
“ON” or “OFF.”
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button, you must push the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
Touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
11
MULTIMEDIA 563
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
• Radio Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a
preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF.
To change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN”
or “20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
564 MULTIMEDIA
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
• Auto-On Radio
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On,” “Off” or “Recall Last”.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
11
MULTIMEDIA 565
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙
566 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
⬙Personal data cleared”.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 6.5AN Settings
Press the Settings button to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings De-
faults, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
11
MULTIMEDIA 567
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touch-
screen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up
or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will
allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
This feature will allow you to select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This feature will allow you to select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
568 MULTIMEDIA
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Español/Français) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “On” or “Off”
button on the touchscreen to turn the Touchscreen Beep
ON or OFF.
Units
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or Driver In-
formation Display (DID), odometer, and navigation sys-
tem (if equipped) changed between US and Metric units
of measure. Press “US,” “Metric” or “Custom.”
• Custom
When “Custom” is selected, you may select each unit of
measure independently displayed in the DID, and navi-
gation system. The following selectable units of measure
are listed below:
Distance — Select from: “MI” or “KM.”
Fuel Consumption — Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG”
(UK), L/100 km, or km/L.
Tire Pressure — Select from: “psi”, “kPa”, or “bar.”
11
MULTIMEDIA 569
Temperature — Select from: “°F” or “°C.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.”
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never.”
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Show Time In Status Bar
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “On” or “Off” button on the
touchscreen.
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync Time with GPS” button on the touchscreen
then select from “On” or “Off.” When “On” is selected
you can only set the day, month and year. If ⬙Off⬙ is
selected you can set hour, minutes, format, show time in
status bar, day, month, and year.
570 MULTIMEDIA
• Set Day
This feature will allow you to set the day. To make your
selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the touchscreen
to adjust the day up or down.
• Set Month
This feature will allow you to set the month. To make
your selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the month up or down.
• Set Year
This feature will allow you to set the year. To make your
selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the touchscreen
to adjust the year up or down.
• Set Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync
Time with GPS “On” button must not be selected. To
make your selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down.
• Set Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
Sync Time with GPS “On” button must not be selected.
To make your selection, press the “–” or “+” buttons on
the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “12hrs” or “24hrs” button on the
touchscreen.
11
MULTIMEDIA 571
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If
Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be can
be set to Far, or Near. The default status of FCW+ is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW+ status, press
the “Fwd Collision Warning” button and select the
“Near”, “Medium” or “Far” button.
• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active
Braking — If Equipped
The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist
(ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward
collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure
when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to
avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system
becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To change the Active
Braking status, press the “Active Braking” button and
select from the following three options: “Off,” “Audio,”
“Audio & Brake.”
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+) With Mitigation” in “Safety.”
572 MULTIMEDIA
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the
steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane
departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either
an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning zone start point. To
change the LaneSense Warning status, press the “LaneSense
Warning” button and select from the “Early,” “Med,” or
“Late” buttons.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
(LDW)” in “Starting And Operating.”
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. The
amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to
the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane departure can be
set at “Low,” “Med” or “High.” To change the LaneSense
Strength status, Press the “LaneSense Strength” button and
select from the “Low,” “Medium” or “High” buttons.
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Starting And Operating.”
• ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the “Sound Only” or “Sound & Display” button.
Refer to “ParkSense” in “Starting And Operating” for
system function and operating information.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion.
11
MULTIMEDIA 573
• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC or Uconnect System (if equipped). The
chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind Spot
Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this
mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is
activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside
mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside
mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on.
When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system
is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press
the “Blind Spot Alert” button and select from “Off,” “Lights”
or “Lights & Chimes.”
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To change the
Active Guideline Status, press the “Active Guidelines”
button and select the “On” or “Off” button.
574 MULTIMEDIA
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image will be displayed for up
to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the
forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView
Backup Camera Delay press the “MORE” button on the
faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then
the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touch-
screen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” but-
ton on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or
OFF.
• Brakes
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.). For further information, refer to “Service
Mode (Unlocking rear brake pads)” in “Maintaining And
Caring For Your Vehicle.”
• Auto Park Brake
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to enable/disable auto insertion of the Electric
Park Brake. For further information, refer to “Auto Park
Brake” in “Starting And Operating.”
11
MULTIMEDIA 575
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, and select
“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Headlight Sensitivity
When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight
Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels:
Level 1 = minimum sensitivity
Level 2 = medium sensitivity
Level 3 = maximum sensitivity
NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the exter-
nal light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with
a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier
than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensi-
tivity setting, press the “1,” “2” or “3” button on the
touchscreen to select your desired Headlight Sensitivity
level.
576 MULTIMEDIA
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating
that the setting has been selected.
• Greeting Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the greeting lights
to be turned On or Off. To change the Greeting Lights
setting, press the “On” or “Off” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired Greeting Light setting.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
To make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams”
button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
• Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
while the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Cornering Lights
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel
rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,
a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the
relevant side to improve visibility at night. To change the
Cornering Lights setting, press the “On” or “Off” button
on the touchscreen to select your desired Cornering
Lights setting.
11
MULTIMEDIA 577
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
with Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On”
or “Off.”
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-
ton on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Lock On
578 MULTIMEDIA
Exit” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, press
the “Flash Headlights With Lock” button on the touch-
screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Lock” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Remote Start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Remote Door Unlock
This feature will allow you to program your remote door
locks to open “All” or only the “Driver” with the first
push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To make your
selection, press the “Remote Door Unlock” button on the
touchscreen and choose from “All” or “Driver.”
NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the (RKE) transmitter
will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all
doors.
11
MULTIMEDIA 579
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Memory Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory Linked
To Key Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Radio Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a
preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF.
To change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN”
or “20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval.
• Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
580 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the
arrows to adjust, or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the
center.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or ”3” button on the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select On or Off.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Press the “On” button to activate Loudness. Press “Off”
to deactivate this feature. When Loudness is On, the
loudness setting increases dynamic range of audio at
higher volumes.
11
MULTIMEDIA 581
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
• Auto-On Radio
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On,” “Off” or “Recall Last”.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which mobile phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
582 MULTIMEDIA
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings Defaults
After pressing the “Restore Settings Defaults” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and
make your selection.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To Clear Per-
sonal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the
touchscreen.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
11
MULTIMEDIA 583
USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an external device to be plugged into
the USB port or AUX Jack.
Located below the heating ventilation and air condition-
ing controls is the front USB port and AUX jack.
Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for external
USB support capability.
Center Console USB Port
Located in the center console is a second USB port.
NOTE: Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB
port may be charge only, or media file capable.
Front USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — AUX/ Jack
2 — USB Port
584 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the rear
of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access
the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port — If Equipped Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
11
MULTIMEDIA 585
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/
enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the selected media (USB, Bluetooth). Pushing the bottom
of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current
track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect
(if equipped).
586 MULTIMEDIA
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Never-
theless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that
the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes.
If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
11
MULTIMEDIA 587
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you
need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 6.5AN system.
Uconnect 5.0
588 MULTIMEDIA
Key Features:
• Five-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/Bluetooth
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
Key Features:
• 6.5-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/SD Card/Bluetooth
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
• GPS navigation (if equipped)
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Uconnect 6.5AN
11
MULTIMEDIA 589
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push To Begin Radio, Navigation, Or Media functions
3 — Push To End Call
590 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session.
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
11
MULTIMEDIA 591
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM.
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1.
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 6.5AN
592 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 6.5AN Radio
11
MULTIMEDIA 593
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth and
Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth.
• Change source to iPod.
• Change source to USB.
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical.
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
594 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith.
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts.
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number).
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number).
Uconnect 6.5AN Media
11
MULTIMEDIA 595
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 6.5AN Phone
596 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say “Listen.” (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be Late.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
11
MULTIMEDIA 597
Navigation (6.5AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 6.5AN Uconnect System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 6.5AN Navigation
598 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
•
U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
11
MULTIMEDIA 599
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes ........................209
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............493
Adding Fuel .............................353
Adding Washer Fluid ......................488
Additives, Fuel ...........................351
AirBag................................237
Advance Front Air Bag ................237, 239
Air Bag Operation .......................240
Air Bag Warning Light ...................250
Driver Knee Air Bag .....................241
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ................253
FrontAirBag ..........................237
If A Deployment Occurs ..................247
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................241
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............252
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...........252
Side Air Bags ..........................241
Transporting Pets .......................274
Air Bag Deployment .......................237
Air Bag Light .....................177, 250, 276
Air Bag Maintenance.......................252
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .481
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........113,126, 484
Air Conditioning ......................109, 124
Air Conditioning Controls ...................109
Air Conditioning Filter .....................485
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............484, 485
Air Conditioning System.................109, 484
Air Pressure, Tires.........................525
Air Recirculation ......................113,123
Alarm
Arm The System ........................49
Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................186
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................317
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............492, 543
Disposal ..............................495
Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) ................210
602 INDEX
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................199, 201
Appearance Care .........................502
Assist, Hill Start ..........................213
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................583
Automatic Headlights .......................93
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
SYNC Temperature Button .................122
Automatic Transmission ..............301, 500, 502
Adding Fluid .......................502, 545
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................502
Fluid Change ..........................502
Fluid Level Check .......................501
Fluid Type .........................500, 545
Special Additives .......................501
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........147
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................147
Axle Fluid ..............................545
Axle Lubrication ..........................545
Battery .............................181, 482
Charging System Light ...................181
Belts, Seat...............................276
Blind Spot Monitoring.......................82
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................485
B-Pillar Location ..........................518
Brake Assist System .......................212
Brake Fluid .............................545
Brakes ..............................209, 497
Brake System .........................209, 497
Fluid Check ...........................545
Master Cylinder ........................498
Warning Light .........................179
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................101
Bulbs, Light .............................278
Camera, Rear ............................340
Capacities, Fluid ..........................543
12
INDEX 603
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...........................480
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............275, 353
Car Washes .............................503
Certification Label.........................357
Chains, Tire .............................534
Changing A Flat Tire....................417, 510
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................513
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)
. . .462
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............274
Checks, Safety ...........................274
Child Restraint ...........................254
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................259
Child Restraints ........................254
Child Seat Installation ....................271
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......268
Infants And Child Restraints ...............257
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .267
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................268
LATCH Positions .......................262
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............265
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ......261
Older Children And Child Restraints .........257
Seating Positions ........................260
Clean Air Gasoline ........................349
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................505
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................486
Climate Control ..........................108
Automatic ......................114,119,126
Manual ..............................108
Clutch .................................498
Clutch Fluid .............................498
Coin Holder .............................151
Cold Weather Operation ....................285
604 INDEX
Connector
UCI.................................584
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........584
Console ................................151
Console, Floor ...........................151
Contract, Service...........................13
Cooling System...........................491
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............493
Coolant Capacity .......................543
Coolant Level ......................492, 496
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................495
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................492
Inspection ............................496
Points To Remember ..................495, 496
Pressure Cap ..........................495
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......492, 543, 544
Corrosion Protection .......................502
Cruise Light .............................205
Cupholders .............................153
Customer Assistance ........................11
Customer Programmable Features .............552
Data Recorder, Event .......................253
Daytime Running Lights .....................94
Dealer Service............................464
Defroster, Rear Window ..............106, 112, 125
Defroster, Windshield ................111,124, 276
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................95
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................450
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................495
Door Ajar...............................183
Door Ajar Light ..........................183
Door Locks
Door Locks ............................52
KeyFob...............................52
Remote ...............................52
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................52
12
INDEX 605
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .......................65
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................360
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........147
Electric Park Brake ........................289
Electric Parking Brake ......................289
Electronic Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................210
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................218
Traction Control System ...................215
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........313
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........187
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......340
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................383
Jacking ...........................417, 510
Jump Starting ..........................435
Overheating ...........................441
Towing ..............................450
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........462
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................481
Break-In Recommendations ................288
Checking Oil Level ......................479
Compartment ..........................476
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................544
Cooling ..............................491
Exhaust Gas Caution .................275, 353
Fails To Start ..........................284
Flooded, Starting .......................284
Fuel Requirements ......................348
Jump Starting ..........................435
Oil...........................479, 543, 544
Oil Filler Cap ..........................480
Oil Filter .............................481
Oil Selection .......................480, 543
606 INDEX
Overheating ...........................441
Starting ..............................283
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................480
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................480
Ethanol ................................350
Event Data Recorder .......................253
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................275, 353
Exhaust System .......................275, 489
Exterior Lighting ..........................92
Exterior Lights.........................92, 278
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................481
Air Conditioning .......................485
Engine Oil .........................481, 544
Engine Oil Disposal .....................481
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................383
Turn Signal ......................96, 203, 278
Flooded Engine Starting ....................284
Floor Console ............................151
Fluid, Brake .............................545
Fluid Capacities ..........................543
Fluid Leaks .............................278
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........544
Fog Lights ...............................94
Forward Collision Warning ..................319
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................447
Fuel...................................348
Adding ..............................353
Additives .............................351
Clean Air .............................349
Ethanol ..............................350
Gasoline ..............................348
Light ................................188
Materials Added ........................351
Methanol .............................350
Octane Rating ......................348,
544
12
INDEX 607
Requirements ..........................348
Specifications ..........................544
Tank Capacity ..........................543
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................349
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................348
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................349
Gear Ranges .............................298
Gear Select Lever Override ..................443
General Information .......................327
General Maintenance.......................478
Glass Cleaning ...........................509
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................364
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................363
GVWR .................................357
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................360
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................383
Headlights
Automatic .............................93
Cleaning .............................508
Delay ................................95
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........95
Lights On Reminder ......................95
Switch ................................92
Time Delay ............................95
Head Restraints ...........................73
Head Rests ..............................73
Heated Mirrors............................82
Heater .................................109
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch.....95
Hill Start Assist...........................213
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................367
Holder, Coin.............................151
Holder, Cup .............................153
608 INDEX
Hood Prop ..............................135
Hood Release ............................135
Ignition
Key..................................38
Ignition Key Removal ......................445
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................47
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................79
Instrument Cluster ........................203
Instrument Panel Cover .....................509
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............510
Interior And Instrument Lights ................96
Interior Appearance Care....................507
Interior Lights ............................96
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............102
Introduction ..............................4
Jacking Instructions........................422
Jack Location ............................418
Jack Operation.....................417, 422, 510
Jump Starting ............................435
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm .........................49
Keyless Entry ...........................55
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Enter The Trunk .........................55
KeyFob...............................55
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ...............55, 578
Passive Entry ...........................55
Passive Entry Programming .............55, 578
Remote Control .........................55
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ..............55
Unlock From The Passenger Side .............55
Unlock Liftgate .........................578
Keyless Entry System.....................30, 31
Key, Replacement ..........................37
Keys ...................................38
12
INDEX 609
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................47
Lane Change And Turn Signals ................96
LaneSense ..............................334
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................223
Latches ................................278
Lead Free Gasoline ........................348
Leaks, Fluid .............................278
Life Of Tires .............................531
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............106
Light Bulbs..............................278
Lights .................................278
AirBag........................177, 250, 276
Automatic Headlights .....................93
Brake Warning .........................179
Cruise ...............................205
Daytime Running ........................94
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................95
Exterior ..............................278
Fog..................................94
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................383
Headlights .............................92
Headlights On Reminder ...................95
Headlight Switch ........................92
High Beam ............................95
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............95
Instrument Cluster .......................92
Intensity Control ........................101
Interior ...............................96
Lights On Reminder ......................95
Low Fuel .............................188
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........189
Park ................................204
Seat Belt Reminder ......................178
Security Alarm .........................186
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............194
Turn Signal ......................96, 203, 278
Vanity Mirror ...........................98
610 INDEX
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......203
Loading Vehicle ..........................357
Tires ................................518
Locks ..................................52
Door .................................52
Lubrication, Body .........................485
Luggage Carrier ..........................154
Lug Nuts ...............................541
Maintenance Free Battery....................482
Maintenance, General ......................478
Maintenance Procedures ....................478
Maintenance Schedule ......................464
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .189, 462
Manual, Service ...........................15
Manual Transmission ...................296, 500
Fluid Level Check .......................500
Frequency Of Fluid Change ................500
Lubricant Selection ......................500
Shift Speeds ...........................298
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................498
Methanol ...............................350
Mirrors .................................79
Heated ...............................82
Outside ...............................81
Rearview ..............................79
Vanity ................................98
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
MTBE/ETBE ............................350
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................288
Occupant Restraints .......................219
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............348, 544
Oil, Engine ..........................479, 544
Capacity .............................543
Change Interval ........................479
Checking .............................479
12
INDEX 611
Disposal ..............................481
Filter .............................481, 544
Filter Disposal .........................481
Materials Added To ......................481
Pressure Warning Light ...................185
Recommendation ....................480, 543
Viscosity ..........................480, 543
Oil Filter, Change .........................481
Oil Filter, Selection ........................481
Oil Pressure Light .........................185
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................160
Operating Precautions ......................160
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................81
Overheating, Engine .......................441
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........5,15
Paint Care ..............................502
Parking Brake............................289
ParkSense System, Rear .....................328
Pets ...................................274
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........519
Power
Brakes ...............................209
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........147
Sunroof ..............................131
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...............233
Preparation For Jacking .....................421
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................234
Radial Ply Tires ..........................527
Radio Frequency
General Information ............38, 42, 46, 48, 62
Radio Operation ..........................586
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................104
Rear Camera ............................340
Rear Cross Path ...........................88
612 INDEX
Rear ParkSense System .....................328
Rear Window Defroster .....................106
Rear Wiper/Washer........................106
Recorder, Event Data .......................253
Recreational Towing .......................377
Reformulated Gasoline .....................349
Refrigerant ..............................485
Reminder, Lights On........................95
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................221
Remote Control
Starting System .........................42
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)................30, 31
Arm The Alarm .........................49
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................55
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........585
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ...................45
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .....46
Uconnect Settings ........................46
Remote Starting System......................42
Replacement Keys .........................37
Replacement Parts.........................463
Replacement Tires .........................532
Reporting Safety Defects .....................15
Restraint, Head ...........................73
Restraints, Child ..........................254
Restraints, Occupant .......................219
Roll Over Warning ..........................7
Roof Type Carrier .........................154
Rotation, Tires ...........................535
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................276
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................278
Safety Defects, Reporting.....................15
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................275
Safety Information, Tire .....................512
Safety Tips ..............................274
Schedule, Maintenance .....................464
12
INDEX 613
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .....229
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ..........234
Energy Management Feature ...............234
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...............226
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................223
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ..............228
Pregnant Women .......................233
Seat Belt Pretensioner ....................234
Seat Belt Reminder ......................221
Seat Belt System ........................219
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................510
Seat Belt Reminder ........................221
Seat Belts............................221, 276
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................229
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........229
Child Restraint .........................254
Front Seat ......................221, 223, 226
Inspection ............................276
Operating Instructions ....................226
Pregnant Women .......................233
Pretensioners ..........................234
Rear Seat .............................223
Reminder .............................178
Untwisting Procedure ....................228
Seats ...................................64
Adjustment ..........................64, 65
Head Restraints .........................73
Seatback Release .........................65
Tilting ................................65
Security Alarm ...........................186
Arm The System ........................49
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............544
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................47
Sentry Key Replacement .....................37
Service Assistance ..........................11
Service Contract ...........................13
Service Manuals ...........................15
614 INDEX
Shifting
Manual Transmission ....................296
Shift Lever Override .......................443
Shoulder Belts ...........................223
Side View Mirror Adjustment .................81
Signals, Turn.......................96, 203, 278
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................534
Snow Tires ..............................528
Spark Plugs .............................544
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................544
Oil..................................544
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................313
Starting..............................42, 283
Cold Weather ..........................285
Engine Fails To Start .....................284
Remote ...............................42
Starting And Operating .....................283
Starting Procedures ........................283
Steering
Tilt Column ............................77
Wheel, Heated ..........................78
Wheel, Tilt .............................77
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............585
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .585
Stuck, Freeing............................447
Sun Roof ...............................131
Sun Visor Extension .......................146
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag.........237
Sway Control, Trailer.......................365
System, Remote Starting .....................42
Telescoping Steering Column ..................77
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........120
Tilt Steering Column ........................77
Time Delay, Headlight.......................95
Tip Start................................284
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......518, 519
12
INDEX 615
Tire Markings ............................512
Tires.............................17, 278, 523
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................531
Air Pressure ...........................523
Chains ...............................534
Changing .........................417, 510
General Information .....................523
High Speed ...........................526
Inflation Pressures .......................525
Jacking ...........................417, 510
Life Of Tires ...........................531
Load Capacity ......................518, 519
Pressure Warning Light ...................194
Quality Grading .........................17
Radial ...............................527
Replacement ...........................532
Rotation ..............................535
Safety ............................512, 523
Sizes ................................513
Snow Tires ............................528
Spinning .............................530
Trailer Towing .........................371
Tread Wear Indicators ....................530
Tire Safety Information .....................512
Tire Service Kit ...........................431
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................369
Towing ................................363
Disabled Vehicle ........................450
Guide ...............................368
Recreational ...........................377
Weight ...............................368
Towing Eyes.............................453
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........377
Traction .............................359, 360
Traction Control ..........................215
Trailer
Towing ...........................363
Cooling System Tips .....................376
Hitches ..............................367
616 INDEX
Minimum Requirements ..................370
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................369
Wiring ...............................373
Trailer Towing Guide.......................368
Trailer Weight............................368
Transfer Case
Fluid ................................545
Transmission
Automatic .........................301, 500
Fluid ................................545
Manual ..............................296
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE).......30, 31
Transporting Pets .........................274
Tread Wear Indicators ......................530
Turn Signals ..........................96, 203
UCI Connector ...........................584
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features ............46
Uconnect Settings ........................46
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ...........578
Passive Entry Programming ................578
Uconnect Settings .......................578
Uconnect Voice Command ...................588
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................17
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .584
Unleaded Gasoline ........................348
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...............228
Vanity Mirrors ............................98
Vehicle Loading .......................357, 519
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................480
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................383
Warning, Roll Over .........................7
Warnings And Cautions ......................7
12
INDEX 617
Warranty Information .....................4,14
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................488
Washing Vehicle ..........................503
Water
Driving Through ........................360
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................505
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................505
Wind Buffeting........................131, 133
Windows ...............................127
Windshield Defroster ...................111,276
Windshield Wiper Blades....................486
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................486
Wipers, Intermittent .......................102
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................104
Wrecker Towing ..........................450
618 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 FIAT 500X
FIAT 500X
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing
& Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
16FB-126-AE
